Service Manual Horizon Ii Macro

SERVICE MANUAL
HORIZON II MACRO
68P02902W96-E
68P02902W96-E
SERVICE MANUAL
HORIZON II MACRO
Service Manual - Horizon II macro
68P02902W96-E Aug 2007
© 2003 - 2007 Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no
liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained
herein. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability,
function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content
hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability
arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or
information about Motorola products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced
in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce
such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This document, Motorola products, and 3rd Party Software products described in this document may include
or describe copyrighted Motorola and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola, its licensors, and
other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right
to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly,
any copyrighted material of Motorola, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the
Motorola products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed,
merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase
of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola or other 3rd Party supplied software,
except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a
product.
A list of 3rd Party supplied software copyrights are contained in the Supplemental information section of this
document.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part
of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission
of Motorola, Inc.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc and its licensors. It is furnished by express
license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
High Risk Materials
Components, units, or 3rd Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT
designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication
Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Motorola and its supplier(s)
specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
Motorola and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners.
The CE mark confirms Motorola, Inc. statement of compliance with EU directives applicable to this product. Copies
of the Declaration of Compliance and installation information in accordance with the requirements of EN50385 can
be obtained from the local Motorola representative or by contacting the Customer Network Resolution Center
(CNRC). The 24 hour telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the
internet, contact the Local Motorola Office.
Aug 2007
Table
of
Contents
Contents
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Resolution of Service Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Incorporation of Change Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Contacting Motorola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
24–hour support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Questions and comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Security advice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warnings, cautions, and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Electromagnetic energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Caring for the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
In EU countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
In non-EU countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CMM labeling and disclosure table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Motorola document set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ordering documents and CD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Document banner definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro

Finding information in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Names and acronyms for main cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Equipment introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Overview of the Horizon II macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Cabinet inside view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Horizon II macro stacking capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Functional diagram of Horizon II macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Comparative overview: Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Comparison overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Compatibility with Horizonmacro and M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Comparison of Horizon II macro with Horizonmacro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
68P02902W96-E i
Aug 2007
Contents
Introduction to Horizon II macro specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Approval and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Software requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Access control requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Horizon II macro physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Structural considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Layout plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Horizon II macro electrical and RF specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Battery backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
RF power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Frequency capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
BSC connectivity options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Chapter 2: Cabinet structure

Horizon II macro cabinet structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
External cabinet views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of structure description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Filled cabinet view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Empty cabinet and SURF2 harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
SURF2 harness and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Cabinet view with installed SURF2 harness components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
SURF2 dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Introduction to the SURF2 dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Description of the dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Top panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Top panel view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
CBIA overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
CBIA diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Backplane and harness view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
CBIA cage function and diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
CBIA harness function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
CBIA backplane function and diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Attachment of cage to cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Interface panel function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Interface panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Interface panel pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Cabinet temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Temperature control overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Cabinet overtemperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Temperature sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Cabinet restart after shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Fan unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fan unit overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fan operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Cabinet door and optional hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Door function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Door external and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Hood function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
View of hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
ii 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Contents
Securing pins and hood removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Stacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Stacking bracket function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Stacking bracket diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Optional Base Band Unit (BBU) shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Stacking bracket front cover function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
View of stacked cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Chapter 3: Power distribution

Horizon II macro power supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Power supply overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Location of power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power supply unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Types and overview of PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
PSU location and redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
PSU module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
PSU alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PSU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PSU backplane protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Circuit breaker card (CBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
CBC overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operation of the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
View of the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Chapter 4: RF modules
RF equipment description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Overview of RF equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RF specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Receive (Rx) RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Transmit (Tx) RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
RF overview and antenna VSWR monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
RF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
RF main components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Antenna VSWR monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RF loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Compact transceiver unit 2 (CTU2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Overview of the CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
CTU2 internal boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
View of a CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
CTU2 front panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
CTU2 Rx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
CTU2 interface function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
CTU2 frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Compact Transceiver Unit 2 Double Density Edge (CTU2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Overview of the CTU2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
CTU2D internal boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
View of a CTU2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
CTU2D front panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
CTU2D Rx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
CTU2D interface function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
CTU2D frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
SURF2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
SURF2 module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
SURF2 module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
68P02902W96-E iii
Aug 2007
Contents
SURF2 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

SURF2 functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
SURF2 to CTU2 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
SURF to CTU2 interface (Horizonmacro indoor compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Tx blocks overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Introduction to transmit blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Screw retention in Tx block locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Tx block connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Blanking plate function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Blanking plate view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Feedthrough plate function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Feedthrough plate view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Feedthrough plate connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Duplexer (DUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Duplexer Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
DUP view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DUP functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
DUP connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
PGSM duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Duplexer Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
PGSM duplexer view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
PGSM duplexer functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
PGSM duplexer connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Hybrid combiner unit (HCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
HCU function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
HCU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
HCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
HCU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
DHU function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
DHU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
DHU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
DHU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Chapter 5: Digital modules

Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Introduction to digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Digital module locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Communication between the HIISC and transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Horizon II site controller (HIISC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
HIISC module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Link to redundant HIISC (Horizon II macro only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Front panel interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Front panel switches and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
PIX output interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
SDRAM, flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Code loading functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
HIISC internal architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
RSL configuration and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Integral HIISC XMUX functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
XMUX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
XMUX module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
XMUX functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Site expansion board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
iv 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
View of site expansion board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Alarm module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Alarm module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Alarm module view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Alarm module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Alarm module replacement - effect on alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Alarm collection from expansion cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Alarm module display presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Chapter 6: Routine maintenance

Routine maintenance overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Reporting faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Routine maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Assumptions - door, hood, and stacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Door opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Hood removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Stacking bracket removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Stacking bracket front cover removal and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Before leaving for the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Arrival at site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Leaving site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Waste material on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-monthly maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Type of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Cleaning inlets and exhaust grilles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
12-monthly maintenance procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Summary of 12-monthly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Checking and cleaning fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Checking normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Annual check of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
24-monthly maintenance procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Summary of 24-monthly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Mechanical inspection of cabinet, locks and hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures

Overview of replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Field replaceable units (FRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
FRU cabinet locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Non-FRU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Policy on non-FRU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
List of non-FRU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Replacing non-FRU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
CBIA attachment screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Replacing a door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Introduction to door replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Views of the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Door replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
68P02902W96-E v
Aug 2007
Contents
Replacing a cabinet heat sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Overview of the heat sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Heat sensor replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Replacing an optional hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Introduction to hood replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
View of the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Replacing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Replacing an optional stacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Introduction to stacking bracket replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
View of the stacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Stacking bracket replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Introduction to fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
View of the fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Identifying fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Fan unit replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Replacing the power input module (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Introduction to PIM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
View of the PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Replacing a circuit breaker card (CBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Preconditions for CBC replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
View of the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Replacing the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Replacing a power supply unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Introduction to PSU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Preconditions for PSU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
View of the PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Replacing a non-redundant PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Replacing a redundant PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Replacing a CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
View of a CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
CTU2 replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
CINDY commissioning tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
CTU2 calibration data exchange scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Test equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Preserving CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Calibration data overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Enabling the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Enabling the preserve feature at the OMC-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Enabling the preserve feature at the BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
CTU2 calibration data exchange procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Preserve CTU2 calibration data procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
CTU2 calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
CTU2 recalibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Calibrating CTU2 bay level offset tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Preparation for Rx bay level calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Rx bay level calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Test frequency tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Site restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Replacing a SURF2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Preconditions for SURF2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
View of the SURF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Replacing a SURF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Replacing the optional SURF2 dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
vi 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Introduction to dual band adapter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

View of the dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Dual band adapter replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Replacing a Tx block, HCU/DHU or plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Introduction to Tx block replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
View of the duplexer Tx block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Replacing a Tx block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Blanking plate, feedthrough plate or HCU/DHU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Digital module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Introduction to digital module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Diagram of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Replacing digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Testing HIISC redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Calibrating the HIISC (GCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Introduction to HIISC (GCLK) calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
When to calibrate the GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Preparation for GCLK calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
GCLK calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Line interface unit board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
View of BIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
View of T43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Replacing a line interface unit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Chapter 8: Site verication procedures

Introduction to Horizon II BTS verification procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CINDY commissioning tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Test equipment, leads and plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Introduction to test equipment, leads and plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Test leads required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
VSWR checks on Horizon II micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Test stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Automatic VSWR test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Manual VSWR test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Tx output power calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Tx enclosure channel numbers and frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Checking the database equipage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Test procedures for checking the database equipage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Checking the backhaul link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Test procedures for checking the backhaul link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Checking PIX connections and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Test procedures for checking PIX connections and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Site restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
68P02902W96-E vii
Aug 2007
Contents
Site restoration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Chapter 9: Parts information for Horizon II macro

Horizon II macro parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Introduction to Horizon II macro parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
FRU items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Ordering method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Horizon II macro FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Spares tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
viii 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
List
of
Figures
List of Figures
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Figure 1-1: Horizon II macro cabinet on plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Figure 1-2: Cabinet with components identified (door removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-3: View of two stacked Horizon II macro cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-4: Functional diagram of cabinet components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Figure 1-5: Example of a mixed BTS site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Figure 1-6: Horizon II macro cabinet site layout plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 2-1: Horizon II macro cabinet views - closed and open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-2: Cabinet showing main components (door removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-3: SURF2 harness components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-4: SURF2 harness components installed in empty cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-5: SURF2 dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-6: Top panel with major features labelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-7: CBIA bare cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-8: CBIA showing backplane and harness connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-9: Front view of CBIA cage showing module locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Figure 2-10: Backplane connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-11: Interface panel connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-12: View of a 2-fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-13: External and internal view of cabinet door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Figure 2-14: View of hood as seen from the front of the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-15: View of the stacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Figure 2-16: BBU shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-17: View of two stacked Horizon II macro cabinets showing airflow . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Figure 3-1: Location of power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-2: View of Horizon II macro PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-3: CBC with circuit breaker buttons identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 4-1: RF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-2: View of a CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-3: CTU2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-4: View of a CTU2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Figure 4-5: CTU2D front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-6: SURF2 module with features identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Figure 4-7: SURF2 functional diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-8: SURF2 to CTU2 connections (2 and 4 branch diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4-9: Horizonmacro SURF to CTU2 interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Figure 4-10: Blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Figure 4-11: Feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Figure 4-12: Duplexer with connectors identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Figure 4-13: DUP functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Figure 4-14: Motorola PGSM duplexer with connectors identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Figure 4-15: Filtronic PGSM duplexer with connectors identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Figure 4-16: PGSM duplexer functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Figure 4-17: HCU Tx block with connectors identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Figure 4-18: HCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Figure 4-19: DHU Tx block with connectors identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
68P02902W96-E ix
Aug 2007
List of Figures
Figure 4-20: DHU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Figure 5-1: Digital module locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-2: HIISC to transceiver communication path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5-3: View of the HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-4: HIISC internal architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5-5: View of the XMUX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Figure 5-6: XMUX interconnection block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Figure 5-7: Site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5-8: Alarm module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Figure 6-1: Removing and fitting the stacking bracket front cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 7-1: FRUs in the Horizon II macro cabinet (door and hood removed). . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-2: Views of the cabinet door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Figure 7-3: Hood, mounted in position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-4: Stacking bracket view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-5: View of the fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Figure 7-6: Fan unit identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Figure 7-7: Power input module (PIM) - DC variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-8: Circuit breaker card (CBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-9: PSU with key features identified. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 7-10: CTU2 view with key features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Figure 7-11: SURF2 showing connector details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Figure 7-12: SURF2 dual band adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Figure 7-13: View of the duplexer Tx block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Figure 7-14: Digital module locations in the Horizon II macro cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Figure 7-15: Horizon II macro GCLK calibration cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Figure 7-16: BIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Figure 7-17: T43 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Figure 8-1: Horizon II macro 9-way to 9-way hardware verification cable connections . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-2: Horizon II macro 9-way to 9-way CTU2 cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 9-1: Diagram of Horizon II macro cabinet showing major FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 9-2: Additional Horizon II macro FRU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
x 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
List
of
Tables
List of Tables
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 1-1: Main components of Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro indoor . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Table 1-2: Horizon II macro specification compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Table 1-3: Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Table 1-4: Horizon II macro weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Table 1-5: Torque values for all cabinet screws/bolts and RF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Table 1-6: Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Table 1-7: Horizon II macro cabinet power supply requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Table 1-8: Horizon II macro power consumption details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Table 1-9: CTU2 RF power output (Installed in Horizon II macro cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Table 1-10: CTU2 RF power output (Installed in Horizonmacro indoor cabinet) . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Table 1-11: Rx sensitivity performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Table 1-12: Horizon II macro frequency band characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Table 3-1: Input currents for power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-2: PSU operational configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Table 3-3: Power supply unit LED functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 4-1: CTU2 front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Table 4-2: CTU2 front panel status indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Table 4-3: CTU2D front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Table 4-4: CTU2D front panel status indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Table 4-5: Tx block connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Table 5-1: HIISC front panel LED indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-2: Alarm module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Table 6-1: Horizon II macro routine maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Table 6-2: Fan positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table 6-3: Normal LED indication of cabinet modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 7-1: Cabinet screw/bolt and RF connector torque values (Nm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Table 7-2: CTU2 calibration scenarios and procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Table 7-3: CTU2 calibration commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Table 7-4: MMI commands for CTU2 Rx bay level offset calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Table 7-5: EGSM900 and PGSM900 test frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Table 7-6: GSM1800 test frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Table 7-7: Connectors for each type of Tx block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Table 8-1: Hardware verification equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2: Test plug pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Table 8-3: Tx output power during tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Table 8-4: VSWR and power calibration commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-5: VSWR and power calibration site restoration commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Table 9-1: Horizon II macro structural and thermal control spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-2: Horizon II macro power distribution spares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-3: Horizon II macro RF component spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-4: Horizon II macro digital module spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Table 9-5: Horizon II macro miscellaneous spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
68P02902W96-E xi
Aug 2007
List of Tables
xii 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
About
This
Manual

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
What is covered in this manual?
This manual contains all the information required to maintain and repair the Horizon II macro
including:
• Technical Descriptions of the hardware elements.
• Repair procedures and parts lists.

The objectives of this manual are to help the reader:
• Gain an Overview of the equipment and interconnection of components.
• Understand the function and operation of all components.
• Recognize configurations and equivalent module functions to previous cabinet designs

(Horizon II macro and M-Cell6).
• Understand how to inspect, maintain, and repair the equipment.
• Be aware of the Warnings (potential for harm to people) and Cautions (potential for harm
to equipment) to be observed when working on the equipment.
• Have access to a clear ready reference for all dedicated information in one manual.
Related information
For detailed installation information for the Horizon II macro, refer to Installation &
Configuration: Horizon II macro (68P02902W97).
For detailed information on optional outdoor enclosure, refer to Service Manual: Horizon II
macro Outdoor Enclosure & Horizon 3G Outdoor Lite Enclosure 68P02903W26 and outdoor
installation, refer to Installation and Configuration: Horizon II macro Outdoor Enclosure &
Horizon 3G Outdoor Lite Enclosure 68P02903W25.
68P02902W96-E 1
Aug 2007
Revision history
Revision history
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following sections show the revision status of this document.
Version information
The following table lists the supported versions of this manual in order of issue:
Issue Date of issue Remarks

A May 2003 Original Issue.
B Jul 2004 Updated to include Dual band adapter hardware.
C Sep 2004 Updated to include PGSM duplexer hardware.
D Sep 2006 Updated to include 4 branch Rx diversity feature.
E Aug 2007 Final
Resolution of Service Requests
The following Service Requests are resolved in this document:
Service
CMBP Number Remarks
Request
SR 2022470 N/A Replacement of analog wattmeter with digital
wattmeter for accurate power output measurement,
resolved in CDCN 02W96-005.
MOTCM00898518/ N/A Improper interpretation of the output of
MOTCM00898533 disp_cal_data command.
MOTCM00892872 N/A Update to the flashing green LED status description.
Incorporation of Change Notices
The following Change Notices (CN) are incorporated in this document:
CN Date CN Number Title
26 Oct 2005 02W96-005 Replacement of an analog wattmeter with a digital

wattmeter for site verification procedures.
2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
General information
General information
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Purpose
Motorola cellular communications documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in
the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola cellular infrastructure equipment
and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be
properly trained by Motorola.
Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or
reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer,
or anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters,
or recommendations made in this document.
These documents are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by
Motorola. They can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such
training.
If this document was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will
not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES
ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major
software release, then corrections are supplied automatically by Motorola and posted
on the Motorola customer website.
Cross references
References made to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references,
emphasized in blue text in electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are
not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of
contents.
68P02902W96-E 3
Aug 2007
General information
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure documents to
represent keyboard input text, screen output text, and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

Items of interest within a command appear like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental

variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Items of interest within a screen display appear like this.
Special key sequences
Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRL-c or CTRL+C Press the Ctrl and C keys at the same time.
CTRL-SHIFT-c or Press the Ctrl, Shift, and C keys at the same time.
CTRL+SHIFT+C
ALT-f or ALT+F Press the Alt and F keys at the same time.
ALT+SHIFT+F11 Press the Alt, Shift and F11 keys at the same time.
¦ Press the pipe symbol key.
RETURN or ENTER Press the Return or Enter key.
4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Contacting Motorola
Contacting Motorola
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our documents.
24–hour support
If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, contact the Customer Network
Resolution Center (CNRC) for immediate assistance. The 24–hour telephone numbers are listed
at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer Network Resolution Center
contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact
the Local Motorola Office.
Questions and comments
Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email address:
mydocs@motorola.com.
Errors
To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network Resolution Center) and
provide the following information to enable CNRC to open an SR (Service Request):
• The document type
• The document title, part number, and revision character
• The page number with the error
• A detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution
68P02902W96-E 5
Aug 2007
Security advice
Security advice
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Motorola systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the
operator based on their particular operating environment. Motorola recommends setting and
using these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects
to be considered are protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information
and assets. Assets include the ability to communicate, information about the nature of the
communications, and information about the parties involved.
In certain instances, Motorola makes specific recommendations regarding security practices.

The implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the
system lies with the operator of the system.
Contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24–hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information, from the menu located to the left of the
Login box. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local
Motorola Office.
6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Warnings, cautions, and notes
Warnings, cautions, and notes

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all
documents of this Motorola document set.
Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are
used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A
warning has the following format:
Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.
Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems,
software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents
no danger to personnel. A caution has the following format:
Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.
Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional

information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:
Note text.
68P02902W96-E 7
Aug 2007
Safety
Safety
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
General safety
The following general safety guidelines apply to Motorola equipment:

• The power jack and mating plug of the power cable must meet International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations – 68P81150E62.
• Power down or unplug the equipment before servicing.
• Using non-Motorola parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair instructions.
• Portions of Motorola equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge.

Use precautions to prevent damage.
Electromagnetic energy
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:
• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure
to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
• Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general

public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national
regulations.
• Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on
the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the
risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within
the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC).
8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Caring for the environment
Caring for the environment

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of
Motorola supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.
Contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24–hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access
to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local Motorola Office.
In EU countries
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union
(EU) directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Motorola
equipment in EU countries.
Disposal of Motorola equipment
European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Do not dispose of Motorola equipment in landfill sites. In the EU, Motorola in conjunction
with a recycling partner ensures that equipment is collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.
Disposal of surplus packaging
European Parliament and Council Directive 94/62/EC Packaging and Packaging Waste
Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipient’s
responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.
In non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Motorola equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance
with national and regional regulations.
68P02902W96-E 9
Aug 2007
CMM labeling and disclosure table
CMM labeling and disclosure table

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The People’s Republic of China require that our products comply with China Management
Methods (CMM) environmental regulations. (China Management Methods refers to the
regulation Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.)
Two items are used to demonstrate compliance; the label and the disclosure table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product.

• Logo 1 means the product contains no substances in excess of the maximum concentration
value for materials identified in the China Management Methods regulation.
• Logo 2 means that the product may contain substances in excess of the maximum
concentration value for materials identified in the China Management Methods regulation,
and has an Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) in years, fifty years in the example
shown.
Logo 1 Logo 2
The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during which the Toxic
and Hazardous Substances (T&HS) contained in the Electronic Information Product (EIP)
will not leak or mutate causing environmental pollution, or bodily injury from the use of the
EIP. The EFUP indicated by the Logo 2 label applies to a product and all its parts. Certain
field-replaceable parts, such as battery modules, can have a different EFUP and are marked
separately.
The Disclosure table is intended only to communicate compliance with China requirements.
It is not intended to communicate compliance with EU RoHS or any other environmental
requirements.
10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Motorola document set

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Motorola document sets provide the information to operate, install, and maintain the
Motorola equipment.
Ordering documents and CD-ROMs
With internet access available, to view, download, or order documents (original or revised), visit
the Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com, or
contact your Motorola account representative.
Without internet access available, order hard copy documents or CD-ROMs with your Motorola
Local Office or Representative.
If Motorola changes the content of a document after the original printing date, Motorola
publishes a new version with the same part number but a different revision character.
Document banner denitions
A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example, PRELIMINARY — UNDER
DEVELOPMENT) indicates that some information contained in the document is not yet approved
for general customer use.
Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the
network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of particular
countries, this encryption occurs at different levels as individually standardized, or may not be
present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally implemented. The document
set, of which this document is a part, covers encryption as if fully implemented. Because the
rules differ in individual countries, limitations on the encryption included in the particular
software being delivered, are covered in the Release Notes that accompany the individual
software release.
68P02902W96-E 11
Aug 2007
12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Introduction to the Horizon II macro

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This chapter provides an overview of the Horizon II macro. It serves to familiarize the user with
the terminology used throughout the manual and facilitate information search and location
within the manual.
68P02902W96-E 1-1
Aug 2007
Finding information in this manual Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Finding information in this manual

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The readers of this manual may locate the requisite information using any of the following:
• A comprehensive Table of Contents (TOC) provided at the beginning of this manual.
• Headings that convey contents to simplify the information search.
• The Index at the end of the manual.
• Chapter 1 of the manual presents an introduction to the equipment and acquaints the users
with the product terminology and technology involved, facilitating information search.
The Service Manual comprises two main sections:

• Technical Description Chapter 1 Introduction to the Horizon II macro to Chapter 5
Digital modules.
Provides an introduction, specifications, and technical descriptions of all Horizon II macro

components.
• Maintenance and Parts Chapter 6 Routine maintenance to Chapter 9 Parts

information for Horizon II macro .
Provides information on maintenance and repair, with procedures to change Field

Replaceable Units (FRUs). Lists of options and spares, with diagrams to illustrate FRUs,
are also included.
The information in each chapter is grouped according to functionality, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Installation information for the Horizon II macro is not provided in this manual (Refer
to Horizon II macro: Installation and Configuration, 68P02902W97 for installation
and configuration information).
The Technical Description information for the Horizon II macro is arranged in the following
chapters based on their functionality:
• Chapter 1 Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Chapter 1 Introduction to the Horizon II macro is a summary of the Horizon II macro

to enable the reader to do the following:
Understand terminology.
Locate information easily, together with requirements.
• Chapter 2 Cabinet structure
Chapter 2 Cabinet structure describes the cabinet structure and inner connections to assist
understanding of the cabinet functions. Working within prescribed operational limits, the
user would not need to dismantle the cabinet beyond Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) level.
1-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Finding information in this manual
• Chapter 3 Power Distribution
Chapter 3 Power distribution describes the different elements in the power supply unit.
• Chapter 4 RF modules
Chapter 4 RF modules describes the functional operation of Radio Frequency (RF) modules
used in the Horizon II macro cabinet.
• Chapter 5 Digital modules
Chapter 5 Digital modules describes the following:

Site Controller Unit (HIISC).
Expansion Multiplexer (XMUX) Module (optional).
Site Expansion Board (optional).
Alarm Module.
• Chapter 6 Routine maintenance
Chapter 6 Routine maintenance contains the procedures for the Routine maintenance of a
Horizon II macro Base Transceiver Station (BTS).
• Chapter 7 FRU replacement procedures
Chapter 7 FRU replacement procedures provides information on the replacement of FRUs.
• Chapter 8 Site verification procedures
Chapter 8 Site verification procedures provides information required for the verification
of the Horizon II macro hardware equipment. The procedures described in this chapter
are as follows:
Checking the antenna VSWR and calibrating the transmit output power.
Checking the database equipage.
Checking the E1 link.
Checking the PIX connections and alarm test.
• Chapter 9 Parts information for Horizon II macro
Chapter 9 Parts information for Horizon II macro in the parts lists contained in this
chapter, each item consists of a description and an order number. The order number
uniquely identifies the required component. Some components may be used in other
equipment in addition to Horizon II macro.
In this manual where CTU2 is mentioned, if CTU2Ds are installed, please read as
CTU2D. If a section of the manual is specifically dealing with CTU2s or CTU2Ds, it is
highlighted at the beginning of the section.
68P02902W96-E 1-3
Aug 2007
Finding information in this manual Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Names and acronyms for main cabinet equipment
This section provides an overview of the equipment in the Horizon II macro cabinet.
The Horizon II macro cabinet consists of the following:

• A cabinet frame structure (including door).
• A main cage with integrated mid-plane.
• A back panel.
It contains the following equipment, as shown in Figure 1-2 Cabinet with components identified
(door removed) on page 1-8, listed up from the base.
• Plinth
This secures the cabinet firmly to the floor (or to the stacking bracket in a stacked
configuration).
• Fan module (x3)
These provide cooling for the cabinet, the CTU2 transceivers and the mounted digital
modules.
• Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The Power Supply Units (PSUs) are load sharing. In a fully equipped cabinet, a fourth PSU
provides 3+1 redundancy. The PSUs contain integral cooling fans.
• Circuit Breaker Card (CBC)
The Circuit Breaker Card (CBC) provides circuit protection and the facility to isolate
individual modules within the Horizon II macro cabinet.
• Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU2)
Provides amplification and signal conditioning for outgoing (Tx) signals and receives Rx
signals from the SURF2. The CTU2 provides 2 X GSM/GPRS and 1 X EDGE capability
with 2 Branch Rx Diversity. It also provides 1 x GSM/GPRS/EDGE capability with 4
Branch Rx Diversity (Horizon II Macro cabinet only). It is backwards compatible with the
Horizonmacro CTU (with BBH limitations in double density form). Up to six CTU2s can be
fitted in the cabinet to provide 12 GSM/GPRS carriers (double density).
• Compact transceiver unit 2 double density edge (CTU2D)
Support both SD and DD EDGE architectures, in addition to the various modes supported
by the legacy CTU2 radios. Similar to the CTU2, carrier A/B definitions and nomenclature
also apply to CTU2D. The radio type CTU2D can be configured in different operating
modes (single, double and capacity) within one cell.
• Alarm module
This handles all cabinet alarm Input/Output signals and provides current sensing for
external site alarms (through the PIX connectors).
• Site controller unit (HIISC)
Provides the site processing functions for the BTS (equivalent to the MCUF in
Horizonmacro). Includes an Integrated Expansion Multiplexer module (XMUX) and NIU. If
redundancy is required, provision is made for an additional HIISC to be fitted.
1-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Finding information in this manual
• Expansion Multiplexer module (XMUX)
An optional module that replaces the site controller unit in an expansion (slave) cabinet
to provide multiplexer connections to the master cabinet. If redundancy is required, an
additional XMUX can be installed.
• Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)
Mounted on the left side of the top panel assembly. Provides the connectors for AC or DC
power input. Also contains the interface panel for customer communications connectors.
• Sectorized Universal Receiver Front end (SURF2) module
Mounted at the rear of the top panel assembly. Provides amplification and signal
conditioning functions for incoming (Rx) signals. One or two SURF2s may be fitted to
provide 2 branch or 4 branch receive diversity.
• Tx blocks
Up to six Tx blocks can be fitted in the basket in the top panel. There are four types of Tx
block available for the Horizon II macro duplexer. They are as follows:
DUP/PGSM duplexer.
Hybrid Combiner Unit (HCU).
Dual Hybrid Combiner Unit (DHU).
• Site expansion board
An optional module that is mounted in the right side of the top panel assembly. Provides
fiber optic connections to expansion cabinets. If redundancy is required, an additional site
expansion board can be installed.
• SURF2 dual band adapter
An optional module that fits into the SURF2 bay in the top of the cabinet. Allows a 900
MHz SURF2 and a 1800 MHz SURF2 to be installed in the adapter, thus providing dual
band capability in a single cabinet.
68P02902W96-E 1-5
Aug 2007
Equipment introduction Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Equipment introduction
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Overview of the Horizon II macro
The Horizon II macro is a 12 carrier Base Transceiver Station (BTS) cabinet, with variants that
operate in the GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands.
The BTS cabinets are designed for indoor use. They can operate from either -48 V to 60 V DC
(positive earth), +27 V DC (negative earth), or wide input, Nominal 120 V to 240 V, AC single
phase supplies.
The new version of the cabinet is hard-wired for -48 and +27 V DC only.
Circulation fans located in the bottom portion of the cabinet provide necessary cabinet cooling.
In addition, each power supply unit contains an inbuilt cooling fan.
Figure 1-1 shows an external view of a standard Horizon II macro cabinet.
Except Figure 1-1, which shows both the old and new versions of the cabinet, only the
older version is shown throughout the manual, unless the text is specifically referring
to the new version. All the technical contents in this manual is valid for both the old
and new versions of the cabinet, unless otherwise stated.
1-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Equipment introduction
Figure 1-1 Horizon II macro cabinet on plinth
Cabinet inside view
Figure 1-2 shows the location and identification of components in a fully equipped Horizon II
macro cabinet.
68P02902W96-E 1-7
Aug 2007
Figure 1-2 Cabinet with components identied (door removed)
• The new version of the cabinet is hard-wired for DC only and hence does not
include Power Input Module.
• External IAS alarm connectors are not present in the new version of the cabinet.
1-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro stacking capability
An optional stacking bracket enables a Horizon II macro to have a second cabinet mounted
on top of the first, as shown in Figure 1-3.
The stacking capability of the Horizon II macro is compatible with that of the
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. This means that a Horizon II macro can be stacked
on top of a Horizonmacro indoor cabinet, or vice versa.
68P02902W96-E 1-9
Aug 2007
Figure 1-3 View of two stacked Horizon II macro cabinets
1-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Functional diagram of Horizon II macro
Figure 1-4 shows the functional modules of a Horizon II macro. For clarity, only one transceiver
and one Tx block is shown. Optional SURF2 would be used in 4 branch Rx diversity.
Figure 1-4 Functional diagram of cabinet components
(Optional)
68P02902W96-E 1-11
Aug 2007
Comparative overview: Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Comparative overview: Horizon II macro and

Horizonmacro
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Comparison overview
The Horizon II macro is an updated version of Horizonmacro. The Horizon II macro acts as a
replacement for the Horizonmacro indoor BTS, and is directly compatible with it. For example,
a mix of up to four Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro indoor (or even M-Cell6) BTSs can be
combined to form a single site, with either a Horizon II macro, a Horizonmacro indoor, or a
M-Cell6 being in control of the other units.
When a Horizonmacro MCUF or M-Cell6 MCU is the master site controller with a
Horizon II macro as an expansion cabinet, the MCUF/MCU must have a PCMCIA
card (running CSFP) installed to accommodate the additional memory requirements
of the Horizon II macro.
Compatibility with Horizonmacro and M-Cell6
A 24-carrier BTS site (in an 8/8/8 configuration) can be achieved by combining a maximum of
four units. The units can be any combination of either the following:
• Horizon II macro
• Horizonmacro
• M-Cell6
Any of which can be the controlling (master) BTS, subject to the requirements described in
the NOTE.
• An MCUF (from Horizonmacro), fitted into an M-Cell6, functions as an MCU.

• An MCU cannot be fitted into a Horizonmacro.
• The HIISC fitted in the Horizon II macro is not compatible with Horizonmacro.
1-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Comparative overview: Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro
Figure 1-5 shows an illustration of a mixed three cabinet site, with a Horizon II macro BTS
as the controller (master). This arrangement requires Software release GSR7 (1740) or
later. (See Chapter 3 Power distribution of Installation and Configuration: Horizon II macro
(68P02902W97) for further details).
Figure 1-5 Example of a mixed BTS site
• In Figure 1-5, the CTU2s in the Horizon II macro BTS are double density and are
therefore capable of handling two carriers each (12 carriers total).
• The maximum site capacity is 24 carriers across all expansion cabinets in the
site.
68P02902W96-E 1-13
Aug 2007
Comparative overview: Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Comparison of Horizon II macro with Horizonmacro
Table 1-1 compares the functionality of main components of the Horizon II macro with
equivalent components of the previous generation Horizonmacro indoor equipment.
Table 1-1 Main components of Horizon II macro and Horizonmacro indoor
Function Horizon II macro component Horizonmacro equivalent

Input power conversion PSU PSM
units (Maximum fitted) (4) (3)
Power to transceivers and Backplane BPSM and backplane
signal routing
Transceivers CTU2 CTU
(Maximum fitted) (6) (6)
Main processor module HIISC MCUF
Processor module Internal XMUX in HIISC Internal FMUX in MCUF (2) or
connection to transceivers (1) and separate site external FMUX (2)
in another cabinet expansion boards
(1 or 2)
Slave cabinet multiplexer XMUX FMUX
Rx components SURF2 SURF
Transceiver to Rx SURF2 harness SURF harness
components
Tx blocks DUP, HCU, and DHU DCF, TDF, DDF, and HCU
(Maximum fitted internally) (6) (3)
DC power supply Integrated in HIISC, BPSM
for digital modules supplied through (2)
(Maximum fitted) backplane
Equipment CBC CBM
protection/isolation
Links to terrestrial network Internal NIU in HIISC NIU
(Maximum fitted) (4)
Alarm handling Alarm module * Alarm module
E1 links CIM/T43 or BIM/BIB CIM/T43 or BIM/BIB
* Not compatible with the Horizonmacro alarm module.
1-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Introduction to Horizon II macro specications
Introduction to Horizon II macro specications

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
All Horizon II macro specifications are included in the following sections:

• Introduction to specifications.
• Physical specifications.
• Electrical and RF specifications.
Approval and safety
Table 1-2 lists the specifications with which the Horizon II macro complies.
Table 1-2 Horizon II macro specication compliance
Specication type Specication number

Type approval ETS 301 502
EMC EN301 489-8
Safety EN 60215, IEC 60215, EN 60950, IEC 60950
Software requirements
All Horizon II macro BTSs require Software release GSR6 (Horizon II) or later in the network.
Use of the optional dual band adapter requires BSS software load 1670.25.t4 and OMC-R
software load 1670.f.t4. Datagen software required is 1670.t20. Future availability is planned
for Software load 1760.0b.
The PGSM duplexer requires Software load GSR6 (Horizon II) 1670.25 or GSR7 1760.0a in the
network.
Use of 4 branch diversity requires Software load GSR8 1800.27 in the network.
Access control requirements
Unauthorized access to the Horizon II macro equipment must be prevented. The Horizon II
macro is suitable for either indoor installation or outdoor installation with an optional out door
enclosure, see Service Manual: Horizon II macro Outdoor Enclosure and Horizon 3G Outdoor
Lite Enclosure 68P02903W26 and Installation and Configuration: Horizon II macro Outdoor
Enclosure and Horizon 3G Outdoor Lite Enclosure 68P02903W25, but must be installed only in
a location where access by unauthorized personnel can be prevented.
68P02902W96-E 1-15
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro physical specications Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Horizon II macro physical specications

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section describes the physical dimensions, weights, torque values and structural
considerations of the Horizon II macro base station. The section also provides a simple site
layout plan to help visualize the site dimensions.
Cabinet dimensions
The dimensions of cabinets are shown in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Cabinet dimensions
Cabinet type Height Width Depth

Cabinet (without hood) 750 mm 700 mm 430 mm
Cabinet with optional hood 870 mm 700 mm 430 mm
Cabinet with stacking bracket 1025 mm 700 mm 430 mm
Two cabinets, with stacking bracket 1900 mm 700 mm 430 mm
between, and optional hood on top
• The optional hood allows cables to enter the cabinet from the back and above.
• The stacking bracket allows a second cabinet to be stacked on top of the first cabinet.
Weights
The maximum weight of the cabinet is shown in Table 1-4. Further expansion may be undertaken
by stacking another cabinet atop the existing cabinet.
Care should be taken to ensure that the oor can support the additional weight.
Table 1-4 Horizon II macro weights
Item Weight
Cabinet, empty 52.7 kg
Cabinet, fully populated 135 kg
Plinth 7.8 kg
Hood 2.03 kg
Stacking bracket 9.3 kg
(Excluding CCB basket)
1-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro physical specications
Torque values
Table 1-5 details torque values used during installation, maintenance and repair procedures.
Table 1-5 Torque values for all cabinet screws/bolts and RF connectors
Screw/bolt size Torque value

M4 2.2 Nm
M6 3.4 Nm
M8 5 Nm
M10 10 Nm
SMA 1 Nm
N-type 3.4 Nm
7/16 25 Nm
• The HCU and DHU use a QMA snap-on or snap-off connector instead of the
N-type connector commonly used on Tx blocks.
• Torque values used with M12 anchor bolts will depend on the anchor bolt
manufacturer. Check manufacturer's data for correct values.
Environmental limits
Table 1-6 lists the environmental limits for Horizon II macro operation and storage.
Table 1-6 Environmental limits
Environment Temperature Relative Humidity

Operating -5°C to +45°C 5% to 100% relative humidity, not to exceed
0.029 gm water/m3 dry air.
Storage -45°C to +70°C 8% to 100% relative humidity, not to exceed
0.029 gm water/m3 dry air.
This specification is valid up to 3 kms altitude, corresponding to an atmospheric

pressure range of 648 millibars to 1048 millibars.
68P02902W96-E 1-17
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro physical specications Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Structural considerations
Adequate clearance must be provided at the front of the cabinet for Operation and Maintenance
purposes. There must be adequate side clearance (50 mm) to enable the door to open beyond
90° (See Figure 1-6). The door can also stop at 95° and 150°, but this is only to protect the door,
or give optional additional operator space.
The cabinet ventilation entry can be solely from the bottom front of the cabinet. This allows
a cabinet to be placed against a wall. However, if the unit is placed 50 mm from back or side
obstructions, such as wall or other cabinets, the ventilation will be improved, and fan noise
reduced.
Up to 100 mm rear space may be required for cables if using a stacking bracket.
The foundation or structure on which the BTS cabinet is mounted must be of sufficient strength
to support the maximum gross weight of the equipment, as defined in Table 1-4.
In seismically active areas, Motorola suggest using a qualified structural engineer to

assess frame mounting requirements, such as floor construction, mounting anchors,
cell site construction, and to provide a suitable design for top frame support if a
stacked configuration is required.
1-18 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro physical specications
Layout plan
Figure 1-6 shows the cabinet installation layout plan.
Figure 1-6 Horizon II macro cabinet site layout plan
68P02902W96-E 1-19
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro electrical and RF specications Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro
Horizon II macro electrical and RF specications

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section describes the power, radio frequency specifications and backhaul connectivity
options of the Horizon II macro BTS.
Power requirements
Cabinet power supply requirements
Table 1-7 lists the power supply requirements for the different power supply options.
Table 1-7 Horizon II macro cabinet power supply requirements
Nominal Voltage Voltage supply range Current supply maximum

+27 V DC (Negative earth) +19.5 V to +30 V DC 204 A (At nominal voltage)
-48 V DC (Positive earth) -39 V to -72 V DC 99 A (At nominal voltage)
120 V to 240 V AC (50 Hz to 88 V to 270 V 45 A (At nominal voltage)
60 Hz)
Voltage transients must be less than 35 V peak amplitude (never below 0 V). Ripple
and noise must be less than 200 mV p-p (30 mV rms) over 10 Hz to 14 MHz. Voltage
application stabilization must be within the specified range in less than 1 second.
The new version of the cabinet is hard-wired for -48 and +27 V DC only.
1-20 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro electrical and RF specications
Power consumption
Table 1-8 lists typical and worst case power consumption values, for example Horizon II macro
configurations.
Table 1-8 Horizon II macro power consumption details
Example Cabinet consumption (W) PSU output (W)

conguration Typical Worst case Typical Worst case
1800 MHz 2/2/2 1107 1664 957 1331
1800 MHz 4/4/4 2152 3155 1862 2524
900 MHz 2/2/2 1365 1835 1180 1468
900 MHz 4/4/4 2668 3498 2308 2798
• In Table 1-8, Typical is defined as using a -48 V DC power source with no

redundancy.
• Worst case figures are theoretical, including fault condition (fans) and
redundancy.
Battery backup
The Horizon II macro cabinet has no internal battery backup as standard.
An optional external Battery Back up System (BBS) can be installed for additional battery
backup capacity. Contact the Motorola local office for further details.
RF power output
Table 1-9 and Table 1-10 lists the RF power output of the CTU2 for the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz
frequency bands in the various configuration options available. In Table 1-9 and Table 1-10 the
RF output power is measured at the antenna port at the top of the cabinet.
68P02902W96-E 1-21
Aug 2007
Table 1-9 CTU2 RF power output (Installed in Horizon II macro cabinet)
Output power per carrier (+/-2 dB)

GMSK 8–PSK
CTU2
Combining
conguration
PGSM900 EGSM900 DCS1800 PGSM900 EGSM900 DCS1800
Single No external 60 W 63 W 50 W 19 W 20 W 16 W
density combining
Double No external 19 W 20 W 16 W N/A N/A N/A
density combining
2 X double One internal N/A 9 W 7 W N/A N/A N/A
density and one
external
stage hybrid
combining
Table 1-10 CTU2 RF power output (Installed in Horizonmacro indoor cabinet)
Output power per carrier (+/-2 dB)

CTU2
Combining GMSK 8–PSK
conguration
EGSM900 DCS1800 EGSM900 DCS1800
Single No external 40 W 25 W 20 W 16 W
density combining
Double No external 10 W 10 W N/A N/A
density combining
2 X One internal and 4.5 W 3.5 W N/A N/A
double one external stage
density hybrid combining
The CTU2D maintains the same output power figures as CTU2, but with a -0/+2 dB
tolerance at mid-band in room temperature and -0/+2.5 dB tolerance applies for all
channels at extreme conditions.
1-22 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Sensitivity
The receiver sensitivity performance of the equipment is shown in Table 1-11.
Table 1-11 Rx sensitivity performance
PGSM900 EGSM900 DCS1800

Conditions
Typical Guaranteed Typical Guaranteed Typical Guaranteed
Static -111.4 -109.8 -111.5 -110.5 dBm -112.5 dBm -111.5 dBm
channel dBm dBm dBm
Faded -108.4 -106.8 -108.5 -107.5 dBm -109.5 dBm -108.5 dBm
channel dBm dBm dBm
Faded with Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to
2 branch -113.4 -111.8 -113.5 -112.5 dBm -114.5 dBm -113.5 dBm
diversity dBm dBm dBm
Faded with Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to
4 branch -117.4 -115.8 -117.5 -116.5 dBm -118.5 dBm -117.5 dBm
diversity dBm dBm dBm
Description
The description related to Table 1-11 is as given below:

• GMSK performance for a nominal 2-2-2 configuration with a duplexer on the main receiver
branch.
• Typical values are the average expected performance over the frequency band when
measured at the main branch BTS antenna port, that is the duplexer antenna port.
• There is approximately 0.5 dB degradation of performance over the frequency band

compared to mid-band. Mid-band performance is typically 0.5 dB better than values quoted
above which are intended to cover the entire receive band.
• Guaranteed values are the worst expected performance over the frequency band when
measured at the main branch BTS antenna port, that is the duplexer antenna port.
• Diversity performance (2 branch) is shown above to be up to 5 dB due to its dependence on

the BTS configuration, antenna spacing or orientation and radio propagation environment.
• Diversity performance improvement (4 branch over 2 branch) is shown above to be up to 4

dB due to its dependence on the BTS configuration, antenna spacing/orientation and
radio propagation environment.
68P02902W96-E 1-23
Aug 2007
All values cited assume the use of certified and calibrated BTS/BER test equipment.
All signal sources, faders, attenuators and RF cables are assumed to have been
accurately calibrated, in order to determine the true power level being applied to
the BTS antenna port.
CTU2 sensitivity when used in Horizonmacro
The receiver sensitivity values in a Horizonmacro cabinet with a legacy CTU2 and a legacy CTU
are the same for similar applications. This occurs because the Horizonmacro receive front-end
modules subdue the Horizonmacro receiver noise and the CTU2 has a receiver noise similar
to that of a CTU. The published Horizonmacro faded sensitivity values are -107 dBm for 900
MHz and -108.5 dBm for 1800 MHz.
Frequency capability
Frequency hopping
The Horizon II macro supports Baseband Frequency Hopping (BBH) and Synthesizer Frequency
Hopping (SFH).
• BBH is not supported if CTU2s are installed in a Horizonmacro cabinet, used in

double density mode, and controlled by an MCUF.
• BBH for edge capable RTFs is not supported when CTU2D is configured in
capacity mode.
1-24 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Frequency band characteristics
BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (Transmit and Receive) with the characteristics
listed in Table 1-12.
Table 1-12 Horizon II macro frequency band characteristics
Characteristics PGSM900 EGSM DCS1800

Transmit frequency band 935 to 960 925 to 960 1805 to 1880
(MHz)
Receive frequency band 890 to 915 880 to 915 1710 to 1785
(MHz)
Transmit/Receive duplex 45 45 95
separation (MHz)
Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200
Number of channels 124 174 374
Transmit frequency guard 935.0 to 935.1 925.0 to 925.1 1805.0 to 1805.1
bands (MHz) 959.9 to 960.0 959.9 to 960.0 1879.9 to 1880.0
Receive frequency guard 890.0 to 890.1 880.0 to 880.1 1710.0 to 1710.1
bands (MHz) 914.9 to 915.0 914.9 to 915.0 1784.9 to 1785.0
Transmit channel centre Even tenths of a Even tenths of a Even tenths of a MHz
frequency (MHz) MHz from 935.2 MHz from 925.2 from 1805.2 to 1879.8
to 959.8 to 959.8
Receive channel centre Even tenths of a Even tenths of a Even tenths of a MHz
frequency (MHz) MHz from 890.2 MHz from 880.2 from 1710.2 to 1784.8
to 914.8 to 914.8
BSC connectivity options
Options exist for E1 and HDSL (Star and Daisy chain) connection.
68P02902W96-E 1-25
Aug 2007
1-26 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Cabinet structure
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 2-1
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro cabinet structure Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Horizon II macro cabinet structure

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
External cabinet views
Figure 2-1 shows an external view of a closed cabinet and a cabinet with the door open.
Figure 2-1 Horizon II macro cabinet views - closed and open
2-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro cabinet structure
Overview of structure description
The equipped cabinet is shown in Figure 2-2. The cabinet is designed for minimum maintenance
and maximum ease of module replacement, and has access only from the front and the top.
This chapter describes the cabinet structure and inner connections to assist understanding
of the cabinet functions. There should be no need to dismantle the cabinet beyond Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU) level.
The cabinet structure components are explained in the following sections:
• Empty cabinet and SURF2 harness on page 2-6.
This section describes the empty cabinet and the SURF2 harness connections between the
SURF2, the backplane and transceivers.
• SURF2 dual band adapter on page 2-9.
This section describes the optional dual band adapter that fits into the top panel.
• Top panel on page 2-11.
This section describes the bare top panel with all the modules removed.
• Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) on page 2-13.
This section describes the CBIA. It also describes the backplane connections between all
modules, and the harness from the backplane to the interface top panel connectors.
• Cabinet temperature control on page 2-21.
This section describes the cabinet temperature control system.
• Cabinet door and optional hood on page 2-25.
This section describes the structure and function of the door and optional hood.
• Stacking bracket on page 2-28.
This section describes the optional stacking bracket, used for mounting a second cabinet
on top of the first cabinet.
68P02902W96-E 2-3
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro cabinet structure Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Filled cabinet view
Figure 2-2 shows a cabinet with maximum number of modules installed. Individual modules are
described in detail in later chapters of this technical description.
2-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro cabinet structure
Figure 2-2 Cabinet showing main components (door removed)
68P02902W96-E 2-5
Aug 2007
Empty cabinet and SURF2 harness Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Empty cabinet and SURF2 harness

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
SURF2 harness and components
The SURF2 harness connects between the SURF2 chassis and the CTU2 connectors fitted on
the back wall of the cabinet. The SURF2 chassis supports the SURF2 modules.
The harness provides:

• Two connectors to each SURF2 for RF and power.
• One RF connector to each CTU2, consisting of four inputs, one each for RxA, RxB, RxC
and RxD, as shown in Figure 2-3. The RF connectors are free floating to ensure correct
fitting of the CTU2 modules.
In 4 branch diversity, the harness routes RF signals from front SURF2 to CTU2 RxA and
RxB and signals from rear SURF2 to CTU2 RxC and RxD. Thus, 2 branch diversity requires
1 SURF2 module while 4 branch diversity requires 2 SURF2s.
• One connector to the backplane is supplied, for power from the PSUs.
2-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Empty cabinet and SURF2 harness
Figure 2-3 SURF2 harness components
68P02902W96-E 2-7
Aug 2007
Empty cabinet and SURF2 harness Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Cabinet view with installed SURF2 harness components
Figure 2-4 shows the SURF2 harness components installed in an empty cabinet.
Figure 2-4 SURF2 harness components installed in empty cabinet
2-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro SURF2 dual band adapter
SURF2 dual band adapter

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to the SURF2 dual band adapter
The optional SURF2 dual band adapter allows a 900 MHz SURF2 and a 1800 MHz SURF2 to be
installed in the same cabinet, thus providing dual band capability. The adapter may be installed
as a factory-fitted option or may be retrofitted in an existing installation.
Use of the optional dual band adapter requires BSS software load 1670.25.t4 and OMC-R
software load 1670.f.t4. Datagen software required is 1670.t20. Future availability is planned
for software load 1760.0b.
Description of the dual band adapter
The dual band adapter (See Figure 2-5) is essentially a wiring harness and SURF2 support
frame that plugs into the SURF2 bay in the top panel. The two SURF2s then plug directly
into the adapter frame.
The wiring harness in the base of the adapter routes the signals from the front SURF2 to the
three CTU2 slots on the right side of the cabinet and the signals from the rear SURF2 to the
three CTU2 slots on the left side of the cabinet. Thus, only a maximum of three CTU2s can be
used for either 900 MHz or 1800 MHz operation. Thus, if a 1800 MHz SURF2 is installed in the
front slot and a 900 MHz is installed in the rear slot, 1800 MHz CTU2s must be installed in slots
0 to 2 and 900 MHz CTU2s must be installed in slots 3 to 5.
68P02902W96-E 2-9
Aug 2007
SURF2 dual band adapter Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Figure 2-5 SURF2 dual band adapter
2-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Top panel
Top panel
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Top panel description
The top panel provides:

• A basket to hold up to six Tx blocks, plus two SURF2s and two site expansion boards.
• A location hole for the interface panel.
• An area for ventilation purposes above the PSUs.
68P02902W96-E 2-11
Aug 2007
Top panel Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Top panel view
Figure 2-6 shows a top panel with the major features labelled.
Figure 2-6 Top panel with major features labelled
2-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly

(CBIA)
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CBIA overview
The Cage Backplane Interface panel harness assembly provides a platform for module
installation, power and digital signal interconnection to cabinet modules. The CBIA consists of:
• The main cage
Providing compartments for fans, CTU2s, digital modules, PSUs and CBC.
• The backplane and harness
Routes power and signals for all cage modules and power to the SURF2s.
• The interface panel
Carries the T43/BIB and the required power and communications connectors.
68P02902W96-E 2-13
Aug 2007
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
CBIA diagram
Figure 2-7 shows the bare CBIA main cage with backplane identified.
Figure 2-7 CBIA bare cage
2-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Backplane and harness view
Figure 2-8 shows the CBIA harness linking the interface panel and the backplane at the rear of
the main cage. Each backplane harness connector is identified.
In the new version of the cabinet the backplane can be accessed using a removable
rear panel.
68P02902W96-E 2-15
Aug 2007
Figure 2-8 CBIA showing backplane and harness connectors
2-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
CBIA cage function and diagram
The main cage holds the modules and supports the backplane. Each compartment has
appropriate sliders for insertion of the modules. Figure 2-9 shows the module compartments of
the cage.
Figure 2-9 Front view of CBIA cage showing module locations
CBIA harness function
The harness provides cables to link connectors on the backplane with connectors on the
underside of the interface panel.
68P02902W96-E 2-17
Aug 2007
CBIA backplane function and diagram
The cabinet design enables all possible RF and digital module combinations to be served by the
same backplane. The only module-to-module cabling required are the Tx cables from the CTU2s
to the Tx blocks. Any external attachments will also require separate cabling.
The backplane is a multi-layered printed circuit board with attached connectors on front and
back. The backplane:
• Routes power and digital signals throughout the cabinet.
• Provides connectors for the harness cables linking to the interface panel.
• Provides connectors for plug in modules.
• Provides power to the SURF2 harness, when the main cage is inserted into the cabinet.
• Provides connectors for three heat sensors in the main cage above the CTU2s.
Figure 2-10 shows the connector locations on the backplane.
Figure 2-10 Backplane connector locations
J10/J11 is for the master HIISC/XMUX and J12/J13 is for the redundant HIISC/XMUX.
2-18 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Attachment of cage to cabinet
The CBIA is fitted to the cabinet at the factory and is not intended to be removed in the course
of normal maintenance or FRU replacement procedures.
Interface panel function
The interface panel provides all connection points to:

• The required power sources through removable Power Interface Module (PIM).
• External IAS alarms (for example, battery backup system alarms).
The new cabinet version does not include external IAS alarms.
• Connection points to all telecommunications links.

All connectors are linked to the backplane through the CBIA harness. Plastic connector covers,
supplied by Motorola, keep unused connectors protected from damage by static or foreign
matter and should be retained.
68P02902W96-E 2-19
Aug 2007
Interface panel diagram
Figure 2-11 shows the locations of the interface panel connectors. It also shows the removable
PIM, which may be AC (three terminals) or DC (two terminals), depending on requirements.
Figure 2-11 Interface panel connector locations
Interface panel pinouts
Interface panel pinouts are detailed in Chapter 2 Cabinet structure of Installation and
2-20 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Cabinet temperature control
Cabinet temperature control

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Temperature control overview
The Horizon II macro cabinet contains equipment that has to be maintained within the
operational temperature range to ensure correct operation of the equipment and to guard
against premature failure of the individual components. The internal temperature is maintained
within these limits by internal fans.
Cabinet overtemperature control
Under overheat conditions, as the temperature rises above preset levels, temperature sensors
located in various areas within the cabinet provide alarms. A further increase in temperature
causes dual sensors, set at a higher threshold temperature to initiate PSU and cabinet shutdown.
The cabinet is restarted when the sensors are reset by a substantial fall in temperature. The
CTU2s have their own shutdown responses to overheating. The CTU2s shutdown if the ambient
temperature exceeds 57°C. The CTU2 shutdown response to overheating provides a second
level of cabinet protection, independent of the cabinet heat sensors.
Temperature sensors
The three cabinet temperature sensors are located above the transceiver rack (See Figure 2-8)
and consists of the following:
• One sensor provides a cabinet overtemperature alarm when air detected at the sensor
reaches 75°C. The alarm is processed by the alarm board and site controller unit, and
sent on to the OMC-R through the BSC.
The ambient cabinet temperature will vary, depending on cabinet configuration

and operating conditions.
• Two sensors shut down the PSUs to protect the cabinet equipment from heat damage when
air detected at the sensors reaches 85°C. Both sensors must detect excess temperature for
the shutdown to take place; this reduces the risk of an unnecessary shutdown. No prior
notification of shutdown is given to the OMC-R, except for the original 75°C sensor alarm.
This is because the site controller unit and CTU2s immediately lose power and functionality.
68P02902W96-E 2-21
Aug 2007
Cabinet temperature control Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Cabinet restart after shutdown
The cabinet is restarted when the overtemperature condition initiating shutdown has reset.
The two 85°C temperature sensors reset at 55°C. This re-establishes an earth point for the
PSU internal detectors connected to the cabinet heat sensors, which then reactivate the PSU
outputs. The site controller unit then reboots as in a normal power up.
2-22 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Fan unit description
Fan unit description

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fan unit overview
Cooling for the cabinet is provided by three fan units, located beneath the CTU2s and digital
modules. Each fan unit contains two fans, as shown in Figure 2-12.
The fan units do not provide cooling for the PSUs or SURF2s. Each PSU contains an
integral fan, which draws in air through the grille on the door and an additional vent
near the SURF2.
Figure 2-12 View of a 2-fan unit
68P02902W96-E 2-23
Aug 2007
Fan unit description Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Fan operation
The fans draw in air from beneath the cabinet, and the air is expelled through the door grille.
The fans run continuously, and respond to temperature changes to ensure adequate flow. The
speed of each fan is controlled by a heat sensor mounted on the fan hub.
2-24 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Cabinet door and optional hood
Cabinet door and optional hood

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Door function
The cabinet is fitted with a door and may also be fitted with an optional hood. The hood cannot
be fitted in conjunction with a stacking bracket.
The door has the following functions:

• Protects the modules from damage.
• Ensures the correct air ventilation.
• Provides EMC shielding.
The door has an external ventilation grille with internal honeycomb grille and a vertical
aluminium air baffle. The door hinges allow detente opening positions of 95° and 150°.
The lock is a trigger latch, opened (if unlocked) by pressing the middle button. There is also a
door alarm bracket, which presses against the cabinet door alarm switch, mounted at the
bottom of the CBC front panel.
68P02902W96-E 2-25
Aug 2007
Cabinet door and optional hood Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Door external and internal view
Figure 2-13 shows both sides of the cabinet door.
Figure 2-13 External and internal view of cabinet door
Hood function
The optional hood can be fitted to keep unsightly cables and connectors out of view, where
this is important.
2-26 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Cabinet door and optional hood
View of hood
Figure 2-14 shows a top view of the hood.
Figure 2-14 View of hood as seen from the front of the cabinet
Securing pins and hood removal
The hood mounts on four pins that screw into the cabinet top panel, replacing existing screws.
The hood can be easily lifted off the cabinet by pulling on the lifting edge at the rear, as shown
in Figure 2-14.
68P02902W96-E 2-27
Aug 2007
Stacking bracket Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
Stacking bracket
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Stacking bracket function
The optional stacking bracket enables a Horizon II macro cabinet to be stacked on top of either
a Horizonmacro indoor or another Horizon II macro cabinet.
The stacking bracket is fixed to the top of the cabinet by eight M8 screws. If the stacking
bracket is replacing an existing hood, then the four hood securing pins must first be removed to
accommodate four of the stacking bracket screws. A second cabinet may be attached on top
of the stacking bracket by four M10 screws.
A Base Band Unit (BBU) shelf is used to house the Horizon 3G-n base band unit. This new swing
shelf for the Horizon II macro stacking bracket is an optional item.
Stacking bracket diagram
Figure 2-15 shows a view of the stacking bracket.
Figure 2-15 View of the stacking bracket
2-28 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Stacking bracket
Optional Base Band Unit (BBU) shelf
A BBU shelf is a new swing shelf for the Horizon II macro stacking bracket. The shelf is
optional and is used to house the Horizon 3G-n base band unit. Figure 2-16 shows the optional
BBU shelf and how it is secured into position by placing the metal tab into the hole on the left
front stacking bracket leg.
Figure 2-16 BBU shelf
Stacking bracket front cover function
The stacking bracket front cover clips onto the front of the stacking bracket and acts as a
blanking panel to match the appearance of the cabinet door.
The stacking bracket front cover cannot be used if the optional BBU shelf is fitted.
68P02902W96-E 2-29
Aug 2007
Stacking bracket Chapter 2: Cabinet structure
View of stacked cabinets
Figure 2-17 shows a view of two stacked Horizon II macro cabinets with front covers attached to
the two stacking brackets.
Figure 2-17 View of two stacked Horizon II macro cabinets showing airow
2-30 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Power distribution
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 3-1
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro power supplies Chapter 3: Power distribution
Horizon II macro power supplies

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Power supply overview
The Horizon II macro power supplies consists of the following elements:

• The Power Supply Units (PSUs) consists of the following elements:
+27 V DC PSU (negative earth input).
-48 V to 60 V DC PSU (positive earth input).
120 V to 240 V AC (nominal) PSU.
The Circuit Breaker Card (CBC).
The new version of the cabinet is -48 V to 60 V DC only.
3-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro power supplies
Location of power modules
Figure 3-1 shows the CBIA with the power modules indicated.
Figure 3-1 Location of power modules
68P02902W96-E 3-3
Aug 2007
Power supply unit (PSU) Chapter 3: Power distribution
Power supply unit (PSU)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Types and overview of PSU
There are two types of DC Power Supply Unit:

• Nominal +27 V (Negative earth input).
• Nominal -48 V (Positive earth input).
There is one type of AC Power Supply Unit.
Nominal 120 V to 240 V
All PSUs have the same external appearance and are located in the same position. Different
types are identified only by front panel labels.
The PSUs are fed from a backplane connector and use pulse width modulation to generate
output supply. A front panel switch (shown in Figure 3-2) disables the output, reducing the
input current as shown in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Input currents for power supply unit
Input load when output

Type of PSU Output voltage full load Input current full load
switch OFF
+27 V nominal DC +27 V 68 A 1 A
-48 V nominal DC +27 V 33 A 0.5 A
120 V to 240 V +27 V 15 A 0.1 A
nominal AC
There are several manufacturers of the PSUs. Each is fully compatible with the same
type of PSU from a different manufacturer.
3-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Power supply unit (PSU)
PSU location and redundancy
The PSUs are mounted vertically above each other on the left-hand side of the cabinet. There
are four slots, three for maximum cabinet configuration plus one for redundancy. Table 3-2
shows the recommended number of PSUs for different operational configurations.
Table 3-2 PSU operational congurations
Number of PSUs
Maximum load capability
tted
2 Complete operation of cabinet for up to three CTU2s.
3 Complete operation of cabinet for up to six CTU2s.
4 Redundancy and power load sharing (further enhancing reliability by
reducing temperature of operation).
PSU module view
Figure 3-2 shows a view of the PSU with the LEDs identified.
Figure 3-2 View of Horizon II macro PSU
68P02902W96-E 3-5
Aug 2007
Power supply unit (PSU) Chapter 3: Power distribution
PSU alarms
There are five alarm conditions for each PSU:

• Output over-voltage.
• Output under-voltage.
• Input under-voltage.
• Overtemperature.
• Fan failure.
The likely cause of the alarm is indicated by a combination of the front panel LEDs (See
Table 3-3).
PSU LEDs
The front panel LEDs indicate the conditions shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Power supply unit LED functions
Green LED Red LED

Indication
(ACTIVE) (ALARM)
OFF OFF
• Cabinet power supply OFF.
• PSU not connected.

ON OFF Normal operation.
OFF ON
• PSU connected and output disable switch OFF.
• Alarm condition with PSU unable to supply

power.
ON ON Internal problem (such as overtemperature), but
still able to maintain supply.
PSU backplane protection
If a power track on the backplane is broken or short-circuited, the PSU detects the fault and
shuts down to prevent further damage.
3-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Circuit breaker card (CBC)
Circuit breaker card (CBC)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CBC overview
The CBC provides circuit protection and manual isolation for all parts of the cabinet, except the
PSUs. It is mounted vertically in its own slot, to the right of the PSUs.
A cabinet door switch is mounted at the bottom of the CBC front panel. Opening the door causes
the switch to be released, sending a door open alarm signal to the alarm module.
The CBC is connected to the backplane to provide isolator switches and overload protection
for the equipment indicated in Figure 3-3.
Operation of the CBC
Power for each protected module is supplied through the appropriate Circuit Breaker button.
Overload of any circuit results in the appropriate Circuit Breaker button tripping to the OFF
(out) position. The button can be pressed to the ON (in) position when the overload problem
has been corrected.
Each protected module (identified in Figure 3-3) can be isolated by pressing and releasing the
appropriate button to the OFF (out) position. Power is restored by pushing the appropriate
button to the ON (in) position.
68P02902W96-E 3-7
Aug 2007
Circuit breaker card (CBC) Chapter 3: Power distribution
View of the CBC
Figure 3-3 shows views of the CBC with circuit breaker buttons identified.
Figure 3-3 CBC with circuit breaker buttons identied
3-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
RF modules
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 4-1
Aug 2007
RF equipment description Chapter 4: RF modules
RF equipment description
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Overview of RF equipment
This chapter describes the operation of Radio Frequency (RF) modules used in the Horizon II
macro cabinet. All descriptions are presented at a block diagram level.
Description of RF modules
The RF equipment and their respective functional descriptions are included in this section.
• Compact transceiver unit 2 (CTU2) on page 4-11.
The CTU2 can support either EGSM900 or DCS1800 frequency bands, depending on
which CTU2 type is installed.
EGSM900 and DCS1800 frequencies are not supported within the same CTU2.
• Compact Transceiver Unit 2 Double Density Edge (CTU2D) on page 4-19.
The new CTU2D radios can support both SD and DD EDGE architectures, in addition to
the various modes supported by the legacy CTU2 radios.
• SURF2 module on page 4-28.
Two versions of the SURF2 are available for the Horizon II macro. They are operated
in the following frequency band widths:
900 MHz frequency band.
1800 MHz frequency band.
4-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro RF equipment description
• 900 MHz and 1800 MHz SURF2s cannot be used in the same cabinet
unless the optional dual band adapter is installed.
If the dual band adapter is installed, notice the following:
CTU2s installed in slots 0, 1 and 2 operate at the same frequency as
the front-mounted SURF2.
CTU2s installed in slots 3, 4 and 5 operate at the same frequency as
the rear-mounted SURF2.
Two SURF2s of same frequency band can provide 4 Branch Rx Diversity
capability, without the need for a specialized adapter. Front SURF2
signals are routed to CTU2 Rx A and B and rear SURF2 signals to
CTU2 Rx C and D.
RF general information and VSWR monitoring function
The following additional information is provided in this chapter:

• General definition of transmit and receive functions.
• An RF overview and VSWR monitoring function description.
• A brief explanation of CTU2 frequency hopping.
These descriptions are intended to assist the reader in understanding the information on the RF
modules.
RF specications
All equipment meets or exceeds ETSI regulations. Frequency information is provided in

Frequency capability on page 1-24.
Receive (Rx) RF hardware
Receiver RF hardware consists of the SURF2 module and the receive section of the CTU2. The
DUP is required for Rx filtering on the main (A) path and is optional for the Rx diversity (B) path.
The SURF2 module provides bandpass filtering and low-noise amplification for up to three
sectors, with 2 branch diversity receive antenna signals, together with switching to CTU2s.
4 branch diversity is possible as a field upgrade with two SURF2s and additional
DUPs for main (A) inputs of second SURF2 installed in the cabinet.
68P02902W96-E 4-3
Aug 2007
RF equipment description Chapter 4: RF modules
CTU2 Rx role
The CTU2 provides the following receive functions:

• Receiver tuning (on a time-slot basis) to any receive channel frequency.
• Demodulation and equalization of the receive channel signal.
• Measurement of the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) and signal quality.
• Recovery of received data from the demodulated radio channel.
• Channel decoding of the received data and processing of the recovered signal. Traffic data
is passed on to the site controller module for routing to the MSC.
• Digital interface to the SURF2 module, which controls selection by the SURF2 switch of
the receive signals from the appropriate antenna.
• Comparison and processing of additional receive paths from a second, and optionally third
and fourth, diversity antenna input to compensate for multi-path fading and interference.
Transmit (Tx) RF hardware
Transmit RF hardware consists of Tx blocks in appropriate combinations to meet requirements

of antenna sharing for the transceivers.
CTU2 Tx role
The CTU2 provides the following transmit functions:

• Transmit tuning (on a time-slot basis) for generation of any transmit channel RF frequency.
• Encoding transmit data output.
• Digital modulation of transmit data onto the transmit radio channel signal.
• Final RF power amplification and output power level control of the transmit radio channel
RF signal.
• Channel encoding of the data to be transmitted, interleaving signal and traffic channel
data, as defined by ETSI.
Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing
Duplexers allow a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receive operations. Normally
duplexed RF signals pass through one antenna, with a second receive antenna to provide
diversity.
4-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro RF equipment description
If a single antenna (non-diversity) is required, the duplex antenna RF receive cable

from the transmit block must be connected to the RxA path at the SURF2. Simply
switching off diversity at the OMC-R without the correct SURF2 conguration will
cause a loss of reception.
68P02902W96-E 4-5
Aug 2007
RF overview and antenna VSWR monitoring function Chapter 4: RF modules
RF overview and antenna VSWR monitoring function

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
RF overview
This section explains the RF functional blocks and additional antenna VSWR monitoring function.
The terminology, functionality, and optional capabilities are set out as a basis for understanding
more detailed descriptions in the RF module sections of this chapter.
RF main components
The following description should be read in conjunction with Figure 4-1.
The RF equipment consists of three main blocks:

• CTU2/CTU2D.
• SURF2.
• Tx block.
CTU2
900 MHz and 1800 MHz versions of the CTU2 are available. Each CTU2 can receive up to 4
Rx signals depending on the configuration of the radio. These inputs are converted into digital
voice or data. The Rx signals provide diversity of the Rx function from the MS (uplink).
The CTU2 generates a Tx data signal, translated from received digital voice or data, which is
transmitted by cable to the Tx block for transmission through the antenna to the MS (downlink).
CTU2D
The new CTU2D radios can support both SD and DD EDGE architectures, in addition to the
various modes supported by the legacy CTU2 radios. Similar to the CTU2, carrier A/B definitions
and nomenclature also apply to CTU2D.
SURF2 module
Two types of SURF2 module are available for use in the Horizon II macro. One provides 900
MHz reception capability and the other provides 1800 MHz reception capability.
Each SURF2 module accepts up to three pairs of antenna inputs. The SURF2 switches the
inputs to the appropriate CTU2s under the control of the database through the HIISC. There are
two inputs to each CTU2 for 2 Branch Rx diversity. There are four inputs to each CTU2 for 4
Branch diversity, with use of second SURF2 module.
The SURF2 does not contain any loop-back test circuitry.
4-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro RF overview and antenna VSWR monitoring function
Tx block
Up to six Tx blocks can be installed in the Horizon II macro cabinet.
Tx blocks filter the transmit signal for the required Tx band. They also use filters to enable the
Rx frequency signal to be passed to the SURF2, if one antenna is used for both Tx and Rx signals.
Antenna VSWR monitoring
Purpose
The antenna VSWR monitoring function is used to detect faults in antennas or antenna path
connections. This is achieved by sending a known signal power level to the antenna and then
measuring the reflected power.
Hardware
The test signal for antenna VSWR monitoring is generated by the CTU2. The DUP contains a
VSWR monitoring circuit that monitors the reflected power. If the return loss from the antenna
port is less than 6 dB, a VSWR alarm signal is sent to the alarm module.
To support the 12 dB of static power control for VSWR monitoring, the minimum
threshold required to drive the duplexer is 27 dBm.
RF loopback
Purpose
The loopback test function is primarily used to identify faults within the RF system. The
loopback test function provides a diagnostic capability at the OMC-R, by creating a test signal to
identify if the fault is either of the following:
• Software (that the OMC-R can correct).
• Hardware (requires a site visit).
The result is a reduction in site assessment visits, and avoidance of unnecessary visits when
hardware is functioning correctly.
68P02902W96-E 4-7
Aug 2007
Hardware
The RF loopback test function is essentially a hardware capability built into the CTU2. Software
instructions activate the test hardware, causing a loopback signal to be injected internally into
the Rx input of the CTU2 to test its receive section.
Software operation
The loopback test function is normally carried out under the control of the OMC-R.
4-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro RF overview and antenna VSWR monitoring function
RF functional diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the basic RF, antenna VSWR monitoring, and CTU2 loopback test functions.
For clarity, only one CTU2, one Tx block, and part of the SURF2 are shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 RF functional diagram
ti-GSM-Hardware-W96-C-00034-eps-sw
68P02902W96-E 4-9
Aug 2007
The Rx antenna for branch B can be connected either directly as shown above, or
through a duplexer, as shown for branch A, so that Rx filtering can be performed.
Branch A is only connected through the duplexer.
4-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Compact transceiver unit 2 (CTU2)
Compact transceiver unit 2 (CTU2)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section provides the technical description of the CTU2.
Two versions of the CTU2 are available for the Horizon II equipment. One version
operates in the EGSM900 frequency band and the other operates in the GSM1800
frequency band.
Horizon II equipment is defined as Horizon II macro, Horizon II mini and Horizon

II micro hardware.
Overview of the CTU2
The CTU2:
• Generates the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and receive functions.
• Contains the digital circuits required for 32 timeslots of channel equalization, encoding
and decoding, and transceiver control logic.
The CTU2 provides the air interface between a BTS and MSs, with the following features:
• Capability of diversity reception (input from up to four antennas) which improves the
quality reception in the presence of multipath fading and interference.
• Frequency change on a timeslot basis for frequency hopping and equipment sharing.
• Static or dynamic transmit power control.
CTU2 features
The CTU2 has the following features:

• Single or double density mode in Horizon II equipment cabinets. Single density mode
provides single carrier GSM Tx capability. Double density mode provides 2 carrier GSM
Tx capability (both carriers must be in the same sector).
• Single carrier EGPRS Tx and Rx capability.
• Backwards compatibility with CTU used in Horizonmacro indoor (with restrictions).
• Two or four branch Rx diversity. (Four branch diversity, available in Horizon II macro
ordered configurations only, requires 2 x SURF2 modules and a second SURF2 harness
cable to be installed. Four branch diversity is not retrofittable in the field).
• Hardware support for Adaptive Multirate (AMR) (upgrade required for pre-GSR7 software).
68P02902W96-E 4-11
Aug 2007
Compact transceiver unit 2 (CTU2) Chapter 4: RF modules
CTU2 Tx RF output specication
For Tx RF output refer to Electrical and RF specifications in this manual.
Location and requirements
The CTU2 shelf is located below the basket for the Tx blocks in Horizon II macro, at the top
front of the Horizon II mini cabinet and at the top rear of the left side of the Horizon II micro
enclosure. This takes up the majority of the space in all types of cabinet.
A Horizon II macro cabinet can contain up to six CTU2s, a Horizon II mini cabinet up to two and
a Horizon II micro enclosure, only one. At least one CTU2 must be fitted in each cabinet. All
CTU2s in these cabinets must operate in the same frequency band (either 900 MHz or 1800
MHz). A Horizon II micro enclosure contains only one CTU2.
CTU2 internal boards
The CTU2 is considered a single field replaceable unit (FRU), which contains:
• CTU2 transceiver (XCVR) board.
• Power amplifier (PA) board.
• Power supply unit.
4-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
View of a CTU2
Figure 4-2 shows the CTU2 with main features identified.
Figure 4-2 View of a CTU2
Rx A (main branch) and Rx B (diversity branch) are the only Rx connectors used in
a cabinet using two branch Rx diversity, that is Horizon II micro, Horizon II mini or
Horizon II macro containing a single SURF2.
Rx C (branch 3) and Rx D (branch 4) are only used in Horizon II macro when a second
SURF2 is installed in the cabinet to provide four branch Rx diversity.
68P02902W96-E 4-13
Aug 2007
CTU2 front panel detail
Figure 4-3 shows the CTU2 front panel and Table 4-1 lists connector functions.
Figure 4-3 CTU2 front panel
4-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
The CTU2 does not have a reset button. A reset is achieved by cycling the power:
• In Horizon II macro using the appropriate CTU2 circuit breaker on the CBC.
• In Horizon II mini using the appropriate CTU2 circuit breaker on the MCBM.
• In Horizon II micro by cycling the PSU.
CTU2 front panel connectors
Table 4-1 lists CTU2 the front panel connectors:

Table 4-1 CTU2 front panel connectors
Front panel legend Function Connection to

TRANSMIT OUT Transmitter RF output Tx block
CONTROL PROCESSOR Test access to processor Three RS-232s
TEST INTERFACE Factory use Test equipment
VCAT INTERFACE Motorola Field Engineer use Test equipment
In Horizon II macro the CTU2 Tx connection is a short SMA to SMA cable to the base of the
appropriate Tx block or feed-through plate. In Horizon II mini and Horizon II micro the CTU2 Tx
connection is either a long cable to the SMA connector on the back of the DUP/PGSM duplexer
or, in Horizon II mini only, a short cable to one of the N-type connectors of the CMB with longer
cables connecting the CMB to the duplexer.
The Tx cables have a 90° SMA connector at one end and a straight SMA connector at
the other end. The 90° end is designed for connection to the Tx port of the CTU2.
The TTY RS-232 serial port has three serial links onto the 9-way connector:
• Radio subsystem (RSS).
• Equalizer and control processor (EQCP).
• Channel coder control processor (CCCP).
A test interface port on the CTU2 front panel provides access to critical test points for factory
calibration and maintenance.
The VCAT interface port on the CTU2 front panel also provides access to critical test points for
factory calibration and maintenance.
68P02902W96-E 4-15
Aug 2007
Alarm reporting
The CTU2 status is displayed by LED indicators on the front panel, as shown in Figure 4-3, on
page 4-14, and detailed in Table 4-2. Major sub-systems, such as synthesizers and RF amplifiers,
are monitored and generate alarm signal for display at the OMC-R.
Table 4-2 CTU2 front panel status indicators
LED Status Meaning

RADIO STATUS Unlit CTU2 is off.
Flashing green Boot code being loaded.
(Do not remove power or reset -
see CAUTION below.)
The flashing green status can also

indicate that the device is locked.
Green Normal operational mode.
Flashing yellow Test mode.
Yellow Transceiver inhibited.
Red Alarm condition.
Alternately flashing red Flash reprogramming in progress.
and green (Do not remove power or reset - see
CAUTION below.)
TRANSMIT (Tx) Unlit Transmitter A is off.
STATUS A
Yellow Transmitter A is keyed on.
TRANSMIT (Tx) Unlit Transmitter B is off.
STATUS B
Yellow Transmitter B is keyed on.
Removing power or resetting the cabinet while the boot code is downloading or ash
reprogramming is taking place will cause memory corruption.
If the boot code is corrupted, contact Motorola Customer Network Resolution Centre
requesting the boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate boot code le.
4-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
CTU2 Rx function
The receiver part of the CTU2 can accept two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals
from each SURF2 or Mini-SURF module (up to four Rx signals in total). These signals are
applied to inputs (branch A and branch B) of the CTU2 transceiver board.
The transceiver can be configured to provide double density receive capacity or 4 branch Rx
diversity (in Horizon II macro only). In double density mode, the receiver provides demodulation
of a main and diversity path for each of two RF channels. In 4 branch Rx diversity mode, the
receiver provides four independent Rx paths for one RF channel.
The input from the SURF2 or Mini-SURF module is filtered, amplified and down converted to
ensure the signal level and frequency range are correct for the next stage.
CTU2 interface function
The CTU2 interface function provides the air interface timing and transceiver control circuitry
required for Rx (uplink) and Tx (downlink) control functions.
The CTU2 interface includes:

• Master GSM air interface timing function.
• Independent Rx gain control interface for each diversity receiver branch.
• Baseband Rx data interface for each diversity receiver branch.
• Receiver front end control.
• Tx data interface including GMSK modulator which provides baseband data to the
transmitter.
• Tx and power amplifier power control interface.
• Rx and Tx frequency synthesizer control which supports RF frequency hopping.
• CTU2 and cabinet alarm data collection.
• Alarms sampling and multiplexing.
CTU2 frequency hopping
The CTU2 supports two types of frequency hopping, synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH)
and baseband frequency hopping (BBH). This section provides an explanation of both types.
In either type, the BTS and MS switch channels after every transmit/receive (Tx/Rx) burst
pair. The difference between SFH and BBH is in the method by which channel switching is
achieved at the BTS.
68P02902W96-E 4-17
Aug 2007
BBH is not possible if the CTU2 is used in double density mode in a Horizonmacro
cabinet which is controlled by a MCUF site controller (refer to System Information:
BSS Equipment Planning (68P02900W21) for further details).
Synthesized frequency hopping (SFH)
SFH is achieved by changing the frequency of each BTS carrier for successive timeslots,
under control of a predetermined algorithm. The BCCH frequency must be constant and must
be transmitted on all eight timeslots. A minimum of two carriers is therefore required for
SFH since for every timeslot, one carrier must transmit the BCCH frequency. The minimum
configuration of two carriers allows the full range of hopping frequencies to be deployed on one
of the two carriers. Uplink hopping is achieved in a similar manner by tuning each receiver to a
different frequency for each timeslot (channel). SFH can be used only with hybrid (wide band)
combining, or with a direct antenna connection to the transmitter(s).
Baseband frequency hopping (BBH)
BBH is achieved by switching successive downlink timeslots between different transmitters at

the BTS, under control of a predetermined algorithm. Each carrier is generated at a constant,
but different, frequency. The number of frequencies available for hopping is therefore equal to
the number of carriers used by the BTS. BBH cannot be used by BTSs with only a single carrier,
since only a single transmit frequency is available. Uplink hopping is achieved in a similar
manner by switching timeslots (channels) between different receivers, each of which receives
at a constant, but different, frequency. Since each downlink carrier is transmitted at constant
frequency, BBH can be used with narrow band combiners – for example, RTCs.
4-18 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Compact Transceiver Unit 2 Double Density Edge (CTU2D)
Compact Transceiver Unit 2 Double Density Edge

(CTU2D)
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section provides the technical description of the CTU2D. The radio type CTU2D can be
configured in different operating modes (single, double and capacity) within one cell.
CTU2D is supported on Horizon II macro, Horizon II mini and Horizon II micro sites
only. When the master cabinets are Horizon II macro, Horizon II mini and Horizon II
micro, the extension Horizon II cabinets support CTU2D; legacy MCell and Horizon
extension cabinets do not support CTU2D and remain OOS.
Overview of the CTU2D
The new CTU2D radios can support both SD and DD EDGE architectures, in addition to the
various modes supported by the legacy CTU2 radios. Similar to the CTU2, carrier A/B definitions
and nomenclature also apply to CTU2D. The following are the different edge modes that the
CTU2D radio supports:
• CTU2D SD: This mode is identical in operation to the existing CTU2 SD and is included
for reference only.
• CTU2D PWR: This mode is also known as ITS Mode whereby the CTU2 and CTU2D
operations are identical. Of the two carriers, if the TS on carrier A is supporting an
EDGE TS, then the corresponding TS on carrier B is blanked. Carrier B TS is capable of
supporting only TCH or GPRS PDs while the corresponding TS on carrier A does not
have an EDGE TS.
• CTU2D CAP: Of the two carriers, carrier A is fully EDGE-capable, while carrier B supports
GPRS/TCH. TS blanking is not required. The maximum output power of carrier A in 8PSK
mode is 10 W* and GMSK mode is 20 W*.
* The output powers listed are for 900 MHz frequency. For all other frequencies, the
output power may vary.
68P02902W96-E 4-19
Aug 2007
Compact Transceiver Unit 2 Double Density Edge (CTU2D) Chapter 4: RF modules
CTU2D features
The CTU2D has the following features:

• Single or double density mode in Horizon II equipment cabinets. Single density mode
provides single carrier GSM Tx capability. Double density mode provides 2 carrier GSM
Tx capability (both carriers must be in the same sector). Double density edge removes
need for ITS blanking.
• Single carrier EGPRS Tx and Rx capability.
• Two or four branch Rx diversity. Four branch diversity, available in Horizon II macro
ordered configurations only, requires 2 x SURF2 modules and a second SURF2 harness
cable to be installed. Four branch diversity is not retrofittable in the field.
CTU2D Tx RF output specication
For Tx RF output refer to Electrical and RF specifications in this manual.
The CTU2D maintains the same output power figures as CTU2, but with a -0/+2 dB
tolerance at mid-band in room temperature and -0/+2.5 dB tolerance applies for all
channels at extreme conditions.
CTU2D internal boards
The CTU2D is considered a single Field Replaceable Unit (FRU), which contains:
• CTU2D transceiver (XCVR) board.
• Power Amplifier (PA) board.
• Power supply unit.
4-20 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
View of a CTU2D
Figure 4-4 shows the CTU2D with main components identified.
Figure 4-4 View of a CTU2D
68P02902W96-E 4-21
Aug 2007
CTU2D front panel detail
Figure 4-5 shows the CTU2D front panel and Table 4-3 lists connector functions.
Figure 4-5 CTU2D front panel
The CTU2D does not have a reset button. A reset is achieved by cycling the power:
• In Horizon II macro, using the appropriate CTU2D circuit breaker on the CBC.
• In Horizon II mini, using the appropriate CTU2D circuit breaker on the MCBM.
• In Horizon II micro, by cycling the PSU.
4-22 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
CTU2D front panel connectors
Table 4-3 lists the CTU2D front panel connectors.

Table 4-3 CTU2D front panel connectors
Front panel legend Function Connection to

TRANSMIT OUT Transmitter RF output Tx block
CONTROL PROCESSOR Test access to processor Three RS-232s
TEST INTERFACE Factory use Test equipment
VCAT INTERFACE Motorola Field Engineer use Test equipment
In Horizon II macro the CTU2D Tx connection is a short SMA to SMA cable to the base of the
appropriate Tx block or feedthrough plate. In Horizon II mini the CTU2D Tx connection is either
a long cable to the SMA connector on the back of the DUP/PGSM duplexer or a short cable to
one of the N-type connectors of the CMB with longer cables connecting the CMB to the DUP.
The Tx cables have a 90° SMA connector at one end and a straight SMA connector at
the other end. The 90° end is designed for connection to the Tx port of the CTU2D.
The TTY RS-232 serial port has three serial links onto the 9-way connector:
• Radio subsystem (RSS).
• Equalizer and control processor (EQCP).
• Channel coder control processor (CCCP).
A test interface port on the CTU2D front panel provides access to critical test points for factory
calibration and maintenance.
The VCAT interface port on the CTU2D front panel also provides access to critical test points for
factory calibration and maintenance.
68P02902W96-E 4-23
Aug 2007
Alarm reporting
The CTU2D status is displayed by LED indicators on the front panel, as shown in Figure 4-5, and
detailed in Table 4-4. Major sub-systems, such as synthesizers and RF amplifiers, are monitored
and generate alarm signal for display at the OMC-R.
Table 4-4 CTU2D front panel status indicators
LED Status Meaning

RADIO STATUS Unlit CTU2D is off.
Flashing green Boot code being loaded.
(Do not remove power or
reset - see CAUTION below).
The flashing green

status can also
indicate that the
device is locked.
Green Normal operational mode.
Flashing yellow Test mode.
Yellow Transceiver inhibited.
Red Alarm condition.
Alternately flashing red and Flash reprogramming in
green progress.(Do not remove
power or reset - see CAUTION
below).
TRANSMIT (Tx) STATUS A Unlit Transmitter A is off.
Yellow Transmitter A is keyed on.
TRANSMIT (Tx) STATUS B Unlit Transmitter B is off.
Yellow Transmitter B is keyed on.
• Removing power or resetting the cabinet while the boot code is downloading or
ash reprogramming is taking place will cause memory corruption.
• If the boot code is corrupted, contact Motorola Customer Network Resolution
Centre requesting the boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate boot
code le.
4-24 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
CTU2D Rx function
The receiver part of the CTU2D can accept two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals
from each SURF2 or Mini-SURF module (up to four Rx signals in total). These signals are
applied to inputs (branch A and branch B) of the CTU2D transceiver board.
The transceiver can be configured to provide double density receive capacity or 4 branch Rx
diversity (in Horizon II macro only). In double density mode, the receiver provides demodulation
of a main and diversity path for each of two RF channels. In 4 branch Rx diversity mode, the
receiver provides four independent Rx paths for one RF channel.
The input from the SURF2 or Mini-SURF module is filtered, amplified and down converted to
ensure the signal level and frequency range are correct for the next stage.
68P02902W96-E 4-25
Aug 2007
CTU2D interface function
The CTU2D interface function provides the air interface timing and transceiver control circuitry
required for Rx (uplink) and Tx (downlink) control functions.
The CTU2D interface includes:

• Master GSM air interface timing function.
• Independent Rx gain control interface for each diversity receiver branch.
• Baseband Rx data interface for each diversity receiver branch.
• Receiver front end control.
• Tx data interface including GMSK modulator which provides baseband data to the
transmitter.
• Tx and power amplifier power control interface.
• Rx and Tx frequency synthesizer control which supports RF frequency hopping.
• CTU2D and cabinet alarm data collection.
• Alarms sampling and multiplexing.
CTU2D frequency hopping
The CTU2D supports two types of frequency hopping, Synthesizer Frequency Hopping (SFH)
and BaseBand frequency Hopping (BBH). In either type, the BTS and MS switch channels
after every transmit/receive (Tx/Rx) burst pair. The difference between SFH and BBH is in the
method by which channel switching is achieved at the BTS.
BBH for edge capable RTFs is not supported when CTU2D is configured in capacity
mode.
Synthesized frequency hopping
SFH is achieved by changing the frequency of each BTS carrier for successive timeslots, under
the control of a predetermined algorithm. The BCCH frequency must be constant and must
be transmitted on all eight timeslots. A minimum of two carriers is therefore required for
SFH since for every timeslot, one carrier must transmit the BCCH frequency. The minimum
configuration of two carriers allows the full range of hopping frequencies to be deployed on one
of the two carriers. Uplink hopping is achieved in a similar manner by tuning each receiver to a
different frequency for each timeslot (channel). SFH can be used only with hybrid (wide band)
combining, or with a direct antenna connection to the transmitter(s).
4-26 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Baseband frequency hopping
BBH is achieved by switching successive downlink timeslots between different transmitters

at the BTS, under the control of a predetermined algorithm. Each carrier is generated at a
constant, but different, frequency. The number of frequencies available for hopping is therefore
equal to the number of carriers used by the BTS. BBH cannot be used by BTSs with only a single
carrier, since only a single transmit frequency is available. Uplink hopping is achieved in a
similar manner by switching timeslots (channels) between different receivers, each of which
receives at a constant, but different, frequency. Since each downlink carrier is transmitted at
constant frequency, BBH can be used with narrow band combiners, for example, RTCs.
68P02902W96-E 4-27
Aug 2007
SURF2 module Chapter 4: RF modules
SURF2 module
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
SURF2 module overview
The Sectorized Universal Receiver Front End (SURF2) module performs the following:
• Low noise amplification.
• RF bandpass filtering.
• Antenna to CTU2 routing.
• Through a switch/splitter matrix.

One SURF2 can route any of three Rx antenna inputs to any of six different CTU2s for both a
main and diversity path. The SURF2 also provides an expansion path from the antenna 0 input
for both main and diversity paths.
The SURF2 is single band and two versions are available for use in the Horizon II macro cabinet:
• 900 MHz, for EGSM900 systems.
• 1800 MHz, for DCS1800 systems.
One or two SURF2 modules may be installed side by side in a slot at the rear of the cabinet
top panel. Two connectors on the underside of each module connect to individual SURF2
harnesses which provide connectivity to up to six CTU2s. Antenna connections are located on
the top of the unit.
• Dual band operation in a single cabinet is only supported if the optional dual
band adapter is installed.
• 4 branch receive diversity cannot be used with the dual band adapter.
4-28 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro SURF2 module
SURF2 module view
Figure 4-6 shows a view of the SURF2 module with features identified.
Figure 4-6 SURF2 module with features identied
Letters in brackets in Figure 4-6 refer to the port numbering on the second (optional)
SURF2.
68P02902W96-E 4-29
Aug 2007
SURF2 functional description
The SURF2 module provides front end filtering, amplification, and matrix control of the RF
receive signal between the antenna and the CTU2. It has three antenna pair connections
providing frequency reception.
The SURF2 functional sections (See Figure 4-7) consist of filtering, amplification, splitting,
digital processing and power selection.
The SURF2 does not support loopback mode and antenna VSWR monitoring.
Each section is duplicated for the second diversity path except for the digital and DC power
section which is shared by the two diversity paths. There are three antenna pair inputs (ANT 0,
ANT 1 and ANT 2) for both of the diversity branches (Branch A and Branch B). There are six
outputs to the CTU2 for both of the diversity branches. There is also an output for an expansion
cabinet for ANT 0 on each branch.
• The SURF2 main branch (A) does not include any internal Rx band filters.
Therefore, Rx connections to the main branch (A) of the SURF2 must be through
a Rx path that includes a duplexer so that Rx filtering can be performed.
• This also pertains to the Branch A inputs identified as Branch C, of the optional
rear SURF2.
Digital codes are transmitted from the CTU2s to the digital section. The digital codes are
dissimilar in order that CTU2s programmed for the 900 MHz or 1800 MHz frequency bands can
be recognized and appropriate switching can be made to the required antenna for transmission
and reception.
The digital and power supply section is also responsible for manual overrides, alarms and DC
voltages.
Alarms
The alarm signal from the SURF2 is active low (0 V) and is multiplexed onto the branch 1 (and
branch 3) RF connection. An alarm generated at an individual CTU2 is caused by an unexpected
number of antenna select pulses being read. An alarm generated at all CTU2s connected to the
SURF2 is caused by one of the amplifiers drawing too much or too little current.
4-30 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
SURF2 functional diagram
Figure 4-7 shows a functional diagram of the SURF2 module.
Figure 4-7 SURF2 functional diagram
ti-GS M-Ha rdwa re -W96-C -0 0 0 3 8 -e ps -s w
The SURF2 main branch (A) does not include any internal Rx band filters. Therefore,
Rx connections to the main branch (A) of the SURF2 must be through a Rx path that
includes a duplexer so that Rx filtering can be performed.
SURF2 to CTU2 interface
Interface block diagram
Figure 4-8 shows the interconnections between the SURF2 and the CTU2, both for 2 branch Rx
diversity (double density) and for 4 branch Rx diversity (single density).
4 branch diversity requires an optional second SURF2 and an additional DUP for
each sector.
68P02902W96-E 4-31
Aug 2007
Figure 4-8 SURF2 to CTU2 connections (2 and 4 branch diversity)
• Rx A and Rx C on the CTU2 carry the SURF2 control and alarm signals.
• The 7-pin connector A on the base of the SURF2 carries 6 X RF signals+1 earth
and connector B carries 6 X RF signals+1 power.
4-32 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Interface description - 2 carrier, 2 branch Rx diversity
The physical interface between the SURF2 and the CTU2 consists of two connections. They
are as follows:
• Bi-directional
The bi-directional connection is for the RF receive main branch (branch 1) and for digital
communication between the SURF2 and the CTU2.
• Directional
The directional connection is for the RF receive diversity branch (branch 2) only.
Interface description - 1 carrier, 4 branch Rx diversity
The physical interface for one carrier/four branch diversity requires two SURF2 modules and
one CTU2. It is similar to the interface for 2 carrier/2 branch diversity, with the third and fourth
diversity branches connected to the second SURF2 as shown in Figure 4-8.
SURF to CTU2 interface (Horizonmacro indoor compatibility)
As the CTU2 is backwards compatible with the Horizonmacro indoor (with restrictions), this
section explains how the Horizonmacro SURF interfaces with the CTU2.
The Horizon macro does not support 4 branch Rx diversity.
Figure 4-9 shows the interconnections between the SURF and the CTU2 for 2 carrier/2 branch
diversity, with loopback (LPBK) and VSWR.
68P02902W96-E 4-33
Aug 2007
Figure 4-9 Horizonmacro SURF to CTU2 interconnections
• Rx A on the CTU2 carries the SURF control and alarm signals.

• The 7-pin connectors A and C on the base of the SURF carry 6 X RF signals+1
earth and connector B carries 6 X RF signals+1 power.
The physical interface between the SURF and the CTU2 consists of three connections.
• One bi-directional connection
The bi-directional connection is for the RF receive main branch (branch 1) and for digital
communication between the SURF and the CTU2.
• Two one directional connections
One of the connections is for the RF receive diversity branch (branch 2), while the other is
for the loopback or VSWR mode selection and the LPBK/VSWR signal.
4-34 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Tx blocks overview
Tx blocks overview
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to transmit blocks
Transmit (Tx) blocks are located in up to six positions in the basket above the CTU2s. There
are four types of internal Tx blocks:
• DUP
Duplexer.
• PGSM duplexer
• HCU
Hybrid Combiner Unit.
• DHU
Dual Hybrid Combiner Unit.
These Tx blocks are cooled by airflow underneath.
Two types of plate can be located in the basket, one as a blanking plate and one to interface
CTU2 Tx cables.
• Blanking plate
This ensures proper air flow and EMI shielding for an unused Tx block location in the
basket.
• Feed-through plate
This converts a single SMA connector to a single N-type connector, used for connecting a
Tx cable from a CTU2 to an expansion cabinet.
Unused Tx block locations must be covered with a blanking plate for correct air ow
and EMC shielding.
Screw retention in Tx block locations
The HCU, DHU and the blanking or feedthrough plates are secured to the floor of the top
panel basket using three M4 screws.
The duplexers are secured to the top surface of the top panel using two M4 screws.
68P02902W96-E 4-35
Aug 2007
Tx blocks overview Chapter 4: RF modules
To ensure correct EMC shielding and general containment, it is important to ensure that all Tx
block/plate screw locations have a screw in place and tightened to the correct torque.
Tx block connectors
The transmit block connector types are shown in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Tx block connectors
RF module Type of connector Destination

SMA (underneath) CTU2, HCU or DHU
DUP N-type SURF2
7/16 Antenna
SMA (underneath) CTU2, HCU or DHU
PGSM duplexer N-type SURF2
7/16 Antenna
HCU QMA (underneath) DUP, DHU or feedthrough plate
SMA (underneath) CTU2
DHU QMA (underneath) DUP
SMA (underneath) CTU2, HCU or feedthrough plate
Feedthrough plate SMA (underneath) CTU2 or another Tx block
N-type (on top) Feedthrough plate in expansion
cabinet
All unused SMA inputs to the Tx blocks must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
4-36 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Blanking plate
Blanking plate
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Blanking plate function
The blanking plate is fitted in locations where a Tx block is not required. The blanking plate
ensures the correct air flow through the cabinet.
The plate is secured to the floor of the top panel basket using three M4 screws.
It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block screw locations have a screw in
place and these are tightened to the correct torque (See Torque values on page 1-17).
This is to ensure maximum quality of EMC and general containment.
Blanking plate view
Figure 4-10 shows a view of a blanking plate.
Figure 4-10 Blanking plate
68P02902W96-E 4-37
Aug 2007
Feedthrough plate Chapter 4: RF modules
Feedthrough plate
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Feedthrough plate function
The feedthrough plate converts a normal SMA connector from the CTU2 to an N-type connector.
The N-type connector is used to connect to a feedthrough plate in an expansion cabinet.
The plate is secured to the floor of the top panel basket using three M4 screws.
Feedthrough plate view
Figure 4-11 shows a view of the top side of a feedthrough plate.
Figure 4-11 Feedthrough plate
Feedthrough plate connectors
Each feedthrough plate connects to:

• The Tx output of a single CTU2, using an SMA connector.
• A feedthrough plate in an expansion cabinet, using an N-type connector.
4-38 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Duplexer (DUP)
Duplexer (DUP)
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The purpose of the DUP is to enable an antenna to serve Tx and Rx paths. This is achieved by
the use of bandpass filters within the duplexer.
The DUP also contains a VSWR monitor that can detect and generate alarms for transmit
antenna systems with a VSWR of 3:1 or worse.
Duplexer Location
In the Horizon II macro BTS, duplexers are located in the basket above the CTU2s, and is
attached to the top panel using two M4 screws.
In the Horizon II mini BTS, duplexers are located in the shelf behind the CTU2s, and is attached
to the chassis using two M4 screws.
In the Horizon II micro BTS, the duplexer is located in secondary cage behind the CTU2, and is
attached to the chassis using two M4 screws.
68P02902W96-E 4-39
Aug 2007
Duplexer (DUP) Chapter 4: RF modules
DUP view
Figure 4-12 Duplexer with connectors identied
4-40 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Duplexer (DUP)
DUP functional diagram
Figure 4-13 shows a functional diagram of the DUP.
Figure 4-13 DUP functional diagram
DUP connectors
Each DUP connects to:

• The Tx output from a CTU2, using an SMA connector. The connector is underneath the DUP.
• One antenna, for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. This connector is on top of
the DUP.
• The SURF2 or Mini-SURF, using one N-type connector. This connector is on top of the DUP.
68P02902W96-E 4-41
Aug 2007
PGSM duplexer Chapter 4: RF modules
PGSM duplexer
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The PGSM duplexer is used to block signals from collocated CDMA networks.
It is similar to the DUP, but provides a high level of rejection up to the bottom end of the Primary
GSM (PGSM) receive band, preventing the BTS from operating on the Extended GSM (EGSM)
channels.
The PGSM duplexer contains a VSWR monitor that can detect and generate alarms for transmit
antennas with a VSWR of 3:1 or worse.
There are two variants of the PGSM duplexer, the Motorola version and a Filtronic version. The
Motorola PGSM duplexer is identical to the DUP, the Filtronic version is approximately 35
mm taller.
Duplexer Location
In the Horizon II macro BTS, duplexers are located in the basket above the CTU2s, and is
attached to the top panel using two M4 screws.
In the Horizon II mini BTS, duplexers are located in the shelf behind the CTU2s, and is attached
to the chassis using two M4 screws.
In the Horizon II micro BTS, the duplexer is located in secondary cage behind the CTU2, and is
attached to the chassis using two M4 screws.
PGSM duplexer view
Figure 4-14 and Figure 4-15 show views of the types of PGSM duplexer with connectors
identified.
The Filtronic PGSM duplexer is taller than the Motorola version, and when fitted
protrudes approximately 35 mm from the slot.
4-42 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro PGSM duplexer
Figure 4-14 Motorola PGSM duplexer with connectors identied
68P02902W96-E 4-43
Aug 2007
PGSM duplexer Chapter 4: RF modules
Figure 4-15 Filtronic PGSM duplexer with connectors identied
4-44 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro PGSM duplexer
PGSM duplexer functional diagram
Figure 4-16 shows a functional diagram of the PGSM duplexer.
Figure 4-16 PGSM duplexer functional diagram
PGSM duplexer connectors
Each PGSM duplexer connects to:

• The Tx output from a CTU2, using an SMA connector. The connector is underneath the
PGSM duplexer.
• One antenna, for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. This connector is on top of
the PGSM duplexer.
• The SURF2 or Mini-SURF, using one N-type connector. This connector is on top of the
PGSM duplexer.
68P02902W96-E 4-45
Aug 2007
Hybrid combiner unit (HCU) Chapter 4: RF modules
Hybrid combiner unit (HCU)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
HCU function
The Hybrid Combiner Unit (HCU) combines two CTU2 Tx outputs for input to the DUP. This
enables up to four carriers (CTU2 operating in double density mode) to be combined onto
one antenna.
The HCU is attached to the floor of the Tx block basket using three M4 screws.
4-46 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Hybrid combiner unit (HCU)
HCU view
Figure 4-17 shows the HCU with connectors identified.
Figure 4-17 HCU Tx block with connectors identied
68P02902W96-E 4-47
Aug 2007
Hybrid combiner unit (HCU) Chapter 4: RF modules
HCU functional diagram
Figure 4-18 shows a functional diagram of the HCU.
Figure 4-18 HCU functional diagram
HCU connectors
Each HCU connects to the following:

• The Tx outputs of two CTU2s, using SMA connectors.
• The Tx input of a DUP, using a QMA snap-on/snap-off connector.
All unused SMA inputs to HCU modules must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
4-48 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU)
Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
DHU function
The Dual Hybrid Unit (DHU) is basically two HCUs, combined in a single unit. The DHU has
three Tx inputs, thus enabling six carriers (CTU2 operating in double density mode) to be
combined onto one antenna. Eight carriers can be combined onto a single antenna if one of the
Tx inputs is fed through an HCU before being fed to the DHU.
The DHU is located in the basket above the CTU2s, and attached to the floor of the Tx basket
using three M4 screws.
68P02902W96-E 4-49
Aug 2007
Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU) Chapter 4: RF modules
DHU view
Figure 4-19 shows a view of the DHU with connectors identified.
Figure 4-19 DHU Tx block with connectors identied
4-50 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU)
DHU functional diagram
Figure 4-20 shows a functional diagram of the DHU.
Figure 4-20 DHU functional diagram
DHU connectors
The DHU connects to the following as follows:

• The Tx outputs of up to three CTU2s, using the SMA connectors underneath the DHU.
• The Tx input of a DUP, using a QMA snap-on/snap-off connector.
All unused SMA inputs to the DHU must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
68P02902W96-E 4-51
Aug 2007
Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU) Chapter 4: RF modules
4-52 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Digital modules
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 5-1
Aug 2007
Overview of digital modules Chapter 5: Digital modules
Overview of digital modules

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to digital modules
The digital modules contained in the Horizon II macro cabinet are as follows:
• Site controller unit (HIISC)
The HIISC provides the processing power, interfacing, and expansion capability for
the BTS.
The HIISC is the equivalent of (but not a replacement for) the MCUF in the
Horizonmacro. One or two HIISCs can be installed in the cabinet, the second one
(slave) provides redundancy in case of failure of the master. The master HIISC is
mounted in the first slot (0) on the right side of the cabinet. If fitted, the slave is
mounted in the slot (1) to the left of the master.
• Expansion multiplexer (XMUX) module (optional)

The XMUX replaces the HIISC in expansion cabinets, where it connects to the HIISC
in the master cabinet through the site expansion board.
The XMUX is the equivalent of the FMUX in the Horizonmacro. A single XMUX is
incorporated into the HIISC for communication with the site expansion board.
XMUX redundancy in expansion cabinets is supported.
• Site expansion board (optional)

The site expansion board provides the control interface and physical link connections
between the master and expansion cabinets through the fiber optic connectors. The
board is only fitted if site expansion is required and must be fitted in both master
and expansion cabinets.
Site expansion board redundancy is supported.
• Alarm module
The alarm module provides all the monitoring and reporting facilities required for
site and customer alarms.
An alarm module is required in all cabinets, whether master or expansion.
Digital module locations
Figure 5-1 shows the position of the digital modules in the Horizon II macro cabinet.
5-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Overview of digital modules
Figure 5-1 Digital module locations
Site expansion boards are only required when expansion cabinets are used.
68P02902W96-E 5-3
Aug 2007
Redundancy
Redundancy capability for each of the digital modules is described below.
HIISC
The master cabinet must contain at least one HIISC (master), installed as shown in Figure 5-1.
A second HIISC (slave) may also be installed to provide redundancy.
Any situation which causes a switch to the redundant HIISC (For example master
HIISC failure or use of the swap_devices command) will cause a site reset.
XMUX
All expansion cabinets must contain at least one XMUX, installed in the same slot location as
the master HIISC in the master cabinet. A second XMUX may also be installed to provide
redundancy.
XMUX redundancy is coupled to redundancy of the HIISC in the master cabinet; that
is, the XMUX is only redundant if the HIISC is also redundant.
Site expansion board
A site expansion board is only required when expansion cabinets are used.
• In such cases a site expansion board must be fitted in slot A (See Figure 5-1) in each
cabinet, expansion board redundancy is coupled to HIISC and XMUX redundancy.
• If the master cabinet has a redundant HIISC and the expansion cabinets have redundant
XMUXs, each cabinet (including the master) must also have a redundant site expansion
board installed in slot B.
Alarm module
An alarm module must be installed in each cabinet, master or slave. Alarm module redundancy
is not supported.
5-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Overview of digital modules
Communication between the HIISC and transceivers
For communication between the HIISC and transceivers, follow the steps described in
Procedure 5-1.
Procedure 5-1 Communication between the HIISC and transceivers
1 The HIISC is connected to the CTU2s in the same cabinet through the
cabinet backplane. Where an additional slave cabinet is used, the data
streams for up to six external transceivers are multiplexed onto a single
line by the internal XMUX in the HIISC and then transmitted to the site
expansion board.
2 Fiber optic transceivers on the site expansion board convert the TTL signals
for transmission to the site expansion boards in the slave cabinets through
the fiber optic cables.
3 The receiving expansion board converts the data stream back to TTL signals
before it is forwarded to the XMUX for demultiplexing. The individual data
streams are then distributed to the appropriate transceivers.
68P02902W96-E 5-5
Aug 2007
Figure 5-2 shows the communication path in block diagram form.
Figure 5-2 HIISC to transceiver communication path
5-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II site controller (HIISC)
Horizon II site controller (HIISC)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The HIISC in Horizon II equipment provides all the site processing functions (except for the
CTU2 RF functions). The functionality of the separate, legacy MCUF, NIU, FMUX, and BPSM
modules in the Horizonmacro cabinet are all integrated within the HIISC.
Each site and module has an electronic ID for remote identification.
Although the HIISC provides the equivalent functionality of the MCUF in

Horizonmacro, it is NOT backwards compatible and cannot be used in a Horizonmacro
cabinet.
The main features of the HIISC are as follows:

• Processors for software and NIU functionality.
• Programmable timeslot interchanger (TSI) that supports the following:

TDM links for single (legacy) and double density GSM and single density EGPRS.
Three expansion links (FMUX equivalent). These links can connect to additional
Horizon II equipment (with double density GSM or single density EGPRS transceivers)
or legacy Horizonmacro cabinets (with single/double density GSM or single density
EGPRS transceivers).
BBH routing for GSM/GPRS (single or double density) or EGPRS transceivers.
• Six integrated backhaul span line interfaces. (When available, an upgrade for the T43/BIB
will support eight backhaul spans on later equipment).
• Programmable synchronization/timing block for support of multiple air interfaces. A GPS

interface is included to support Compact EGPRS and other air interfaces that require
inter-site synchronization.
HIISC module view
Figure 5-3 shows a HIISC module.
68P02902W96-E 5-7
Aug 2007
Horizon II site controller (HIISC) Chapter 5: Digital modules
Figure 5-3 View of the HIISC
Link to redundant HIISC (Horizon II macro only)
The link to the redundant HIISC is similar to a transceiver link, but does not have the BBH
capability, or the link delay measurement and compensation facility. The 6.12 s and 60 ms,
signals are inserted into timeslots 8 and 16.
When the HIISC is in slave mode, timeslot and backhaul clock information is extracted from
the HIISC link and passed to the sync block.
The main processor HDLC link to the redundant HIISC can be routed in any unused timeslot(s)
of this link.
5-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
The ASIC can switch any timeslot on the redundancy link to any timeslot on any of the other links
connected to it such as the transceiver links, network links, redundancy link or processor links.
Front panel interfaces
The following interface connections are located on the HIISC front panel:
• Compact flash card interface
The compact flash card slot is located on the front panel of the HIISC, and is used for:
Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP) memory.
Rapid site initialization.

The 32 Mbyte card can be write enabled for upgrade of site information, or disabled to
protect card use for other sites or secure the site code.
• TTY MMI interface
A standard TTY interface is provided on the front panel, of 9.6 kbit/s (8 bits, no parity, 1
stop bit (8 N 1)). A local maintenance terminal can be attached to this port to use the
MMI (Man Machine Interface) of the HIISC.
• CAL port
The CAL port on the front panel of the HIISC can be used to calibrate the sync block clock
through MMI commands. The 8 kHz reference output is used in the GCLK calibration
procedure (see chapter on FRU replacement procedures, later in this manual).
• NIU ethernet port and SYNC/NIU TTY port
These ports are for Motorola test purposes only.
Front panel switches and indicators
The front panel of the HIISC has two reset switches as shown in Figure 5-3 View of the HIISC on
page 5-8:
• FULL is a hard reset (power up - removes software from the memory).
• CPU is a soft reset (this resets the HIISC main processors, but the software remains
in RAM).
A hard reset results in the software being reloaded to the DRAM in the same way as normal
power up.
During the CPU (soft) reset, pressing CPU reset again causes a hard reset. Pressing
the CPU reset button twice thus has the same effect as a hard reset.
68P02902W96-E 5-9
Aug 2007
The HIISC has two front panel LEDs (one green and one red) as shown in Figure 5-3 View of the
HIISC on page 5-8, with indications listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 HIISC front panel LED indication
Red Green Status

Off Off Board not powered up or in reset cycle.
Off On Normal operation.
On Off Fault condition.
Flashing Flashing Non-volatile memory boot code upgrade.
(Do not remove power or reset - see CAUTION).
When red and green LEDs are ashing, the boot code is downloading into non-volatile
memory for software upgrade. Do not remove power or reset the cabinet until
downloading has been completed, as this will corrupt the non-volatile memory. If
boot code is corrupted, contact the Motorola Customer Network Resolution Centre,
requesting the boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate boot code le.
PIX output interfaces
The HIISC provides a serial interface for the PIX outputs. These are routed to the cabinet alarm
board and enable relay contact control of external customer equipment.
If the high power external fan option is fitted to the unit then the PIX output D-type
connector must be terminated with the supplied dongle.
5-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
SDRAM, ash EPROM
The HIISC has the following memory:

• SDRAM
The 32 MByte SDRAM provides operational code and data storage for the main processors.
• Flash EPROM
The 8 MByte flash EPROM has the following functions:

Storing boot code and executive process code. It has a fast access time (< 75 ns),
enabling direct execution. The boot code is factory set, and reprogrammed only in
major software upgrades.
Non-volatile data storage of diagnostic data and module ID information.
Code loading functions
The HIISC performs the following code loading functions:

• Code loading
The boot and executive code held in the flash EPROM initiates the HIISC on power up or
reset. If a compact flash card is fitted, operational code may be obtained from it and
copied to the SDRAM for execution. If no card or code is available, the operational code is
obtained from the BSC.
Before execution, the operational code held in SDRAM is checked with code held at the
BSC. The BSC downloads any changed code objects to the SDRAM.
After successful checking of the SDRAM operational code, the code is executed and the
compact flash card is updated with any changed objects.
• CSFP code loading
If a compact flash card is available, then a code storage facility processor (CSFP) function
can be supported. A new software load can be downloaded in the background, without any
reduction in service, and stored on the compact flash card.
Once the complete load has been transferred to the compact flash card, a code swap can
be initiated. The site is reset and the new software brought into service (< 10 minutes). As
a precaution, the old version is held on the compact flash card to support a roll back to
the original version if required.
68P02902W96-E 5-11
Aug 2007
HIISC internal architecture
This section describes the internal connections and individual elements of the HIISC, relating to
site control. Figure 5-4 shows the internal architecture of the HIISC.
Figure 5-4 HIISC internal architecture
LIU and framers
Dual mode backhaul LIU and framers are used, thus permitting the soft selection of E1 span
line connections.
The LIU/framer bridges between the internal 32 timeslot 2048 kbit/s TDM highway and the
external E1 2048 kbit/s TDM formats.
Timing extraction: A 2048/1544 kHz frequency reference and a 125 ms timing reference
is extracted by the framer/LIU from each span. This unit also performs jitter and wander
attenuation.
Each of the extracted references are fed into a switch that is under site control processor
supervision. This is used to select the reference used for phase locking the SYNC function.
5-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Timeslot interchanger (TSI)
The TSI is controlled by the site control processor (the NIU control processor is not equipped
with a TSI control interface). A 64 kbit/s timeslot switch is responsible (within the context of
backhaul and RSL requirements) for switching the following:
• Timeslots containing TRAU between the CTU2s and NIU framer / LIU.
• Timeslots containing RSL traffic between the NIU framer / LIU and NIU control processor.
• Timeslots containing NIU control messages and RSL traffic stripped of LAPD between the
NIU control processor and the site control processor.
• Inserting 16 kbit/s RSL links into a bit-pair of a designated timeslot.

The use of the TSI in this fashion allows a RSL to be placed into any timeslot (other than timeslot
0 in E1 systems) on any of the 6 spans. The design provides complete flexibility in the number
of timeslots on any span that can be used for RSL traffic. Indeed, all 6 could be placed on a
single span. However, each RSL has the limitation that the uplink (BTS to BSC) and downlink
(BSC to BTS) timeslot mappings are identical.
Daisy chains: The HIISC supports backhaul daisy chain configurations. Traffic for upstream
sites is routed through the TSI, allowing for multiplexing over shared spans with local site traffic.
TRAU: Span lines transporting TRAU are switched to the appropriate CTU2 by the TSI.
NIU control processor and RSL termination
The NIU control processor terminates the LAPD protocol layer for each RSL. It supports up to 8
separate and simultaneous LAPD connections. Each LAPD connection may be configured as
either a 64 kbit/s link or as a 16 kbit/s link.
The NIU control processor also configures and monitors the LIU / framer. To facilitate these
functions the NIU control processor has a control interface to the LIU / framer and a dual 32
timeslot 2048 kbit/s TDM interface to the TSI.
The NIU control processor terminates up to 16 full duplex HDLC channels - up to 8 for LAPD
transport to the BSC and up to 8 for RSL (including one for control) transport to the site control
processor.
Span type selection: The NIU defaults to the E1 interface type for all span lines.
Backhaul framing options: The NIU can enable and disable timeslot 0 CRC-4
multi-framing (enabled by default). Selection is supported by a message interface with the site
control processor. In either case, timeslot 16 multi-framing is disabled (allowing timeslot 16 to
used for TRAU or RSL traffic) and HDB3 line coding is used.
Backhaul N-bit facility: The NIU can enable and disable the use backhaul N-bits for alarm
indications. Selection is supported by a message interface with the site control processor.
68P02902W96-E 5-13
Aug 2007
Site control processor
The site control processor is provisioned with a control interface for the TSI and two 2048
kbit/s TDM interfaces to the TSI. It is responsible for configuration of the TSI and control
and monitoring of the NIU.
NIU control processor to site control processor interface
The interface between the NIU control processor and the site control processor consists of NIU
control messages plus RSL messages stripped of the LAPD protocol. Each RSL connection to
the BSC utilizes a 64 kbit/s timeslot between the NIU control processor and the site control
processor.
A 64 kbit/s connection is used, regardless of whether the connection to the BSC is

operating at 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s.
NIU control messages, including those used to establish, reconfigure and disconnect RSL links,
are always carried within timeslot 0 on the NIU TDM port 0. These messages are multiplexed
with traffic comprising the first established RSL. The site control processor dynamically assigns
additional RSL connections to any of the other remaining 31 timeslots of NIU TDM port 0 or
32 timeslots of NIU TDM port 1.
RSL conguration and control
LAPD links
Each LAPD link is configured with the following default parameters:

• T203 = 10 seconds.
• The maximum I frame size (N201 = 610 bytes).

The site control processor is able to configure the following parameters for each LAPD
connection through the control message interface to the NIU control processor:
• Rate (64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s).
• Bit-pair for 16 kbit/s connections.
• SAP.
• TEI.
5-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
• The maximum number of outstanding I frames (k value).
• The maximum number of retransmissions (N200).
The span line timeslot and span line are not required as the site control processor
sets these directly at the TSI.
Additionally, the site control processor specifies the following internal connection parameters:
• NIU port and timeslot for the connection between the NIU control processor and the site
control processor.
• NIU port and timeslot for the connection between the NIU control processor and the TSI.
16 kbit/s RSLs
Any or all of the 8 RSL links can be configured at either 16 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s. When configured
at 16 kbit/s, a RSL occupies a bit-pair within a single timeslot. Four bit-pair positions are
supported; bits 0 and 1, bits 2 and 3, bits 4 and 5, bits 6 and 7.
For downlink flows, the TSI switches the entire timeslot containing the 16 kbit/s bit-pair onto a
NIU port timeslot. The NIU control processor recovers the LAPD from the designated bit-pair.
For uplink flows, the NIU control processor places the LAPD within the designated bit-pair and
timeslot on its TSI connection. The TSI then inserts this bit-pair into a designated timeslot,
while preserving the content of the other six bits within that timeslot.
RSL and span alarms
LAPD link management events for each LAPD connection and span alarm events for each span
are reported to the site control processor by the NIU control processor.
Flow control
The interface between the NIU control processor and the site control processor supports flow
control. This enables the NIU processor to throttle RSL traffic from the site control processor in
the event of an overload condition. This condition may occur when 16 kbit/s RSL links are active
or when multiple heavily loaded 64 kbit/s RSL links are active.
To reduce the possibility of overloading, the processing delay within the NIU control processor
is minimized and the RSL message buffer depth is maximized. A fully loaded NIU (up to 8
established RSL links) maintains a maximum processor delay of less than 25 ms per message.
Delay is measured from receipt of the end of the incoming frame to the start of transmission of
the outgoing frame. The NIU control processor has 2000 kbytes of message buffers.
68P02902W96-E 5-15
Aug 2007
Integral HIISC XMUX functionality
The equivalent functionality of a separate XMUX module is integrated within the HIISC, thus
enabling the HIISC in the master cabinet to communicate with the CTU2s in up to three
expansion cabinets through fiber optic links between the site expansion boards.
5-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro XMUX module
XMUX module
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The expansion multiplexer (XMUX) module replaces the HIISC in expansion cabinets and
provides the interface to the master cabinet.
Two XMUX modules may be installed in a Horizon II macro expansion cabinet, one for the
master HIISC, and one for the slave. A Horizon II macro expansion cabinet only requires one
XMUX to connect up to six CTU2s within the cabinet (plus one for redundancy if required).
A Horizon II mini or Horizon II micro expansion cabinet only requires one XMUX to connect up
to two CTU2s within the cabinet.
If Horizon II expansion cabinets are added, the master cabinet and expansion cabinets
must also contain site expansion boards.
The XMUX can support up to six transceiver links. It uses a 16.384 Mbit/s Manchester encoded
serial data link, organized as 256 x 8-bit timeslots in a 125 microsecond frame. Manchester
coding is used to detect errors, indicated at timeslot 0 for each transceiver, enabling error
correction at the receiving XMUX.
Although the XMUX provides the equivalent functionality of the FMUX in

Horizonmacro, it is NOT backwards compatible and cannot be used in a Horizonmacro
cabinet.
XMUX module view
Figure 5-5 shows a XMUX module.
68P02902W96-E 5-17
Aug 2007
XMUX module Chapter 5: Digital modules
Figure 5-5 View of the XMUX module
XMUX functional description
The HIISC transmits and receives a 2.048 Mbit/s data stream link to each operational CTU2. In
the master cabinet this is routed through the backplane, without the need for a XMUX.
If the CTU2 is in an expansion cabinet, the integrated XMUX in the HIISC combines the data
stream with up to five others and then sends the multiplexed signal to the site expansion
board through the backplane. The site expansion board performs a TTL to fiber optic signal
conversion, for onward transmission to the expansion cabinet through fiber optic cables.
At the expansion cabinet, another site expansion board converts the fiber optic signal back to
electronic form and sends this to the XMUX. The XMUX demultiplexes the signal and sends the
data stream to the appropriate CTU2.
The data stream return path from the CTU2 in the expansion cabinet is a reversal of the above.
5-18 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro XMUX module
Figure 5-6 XMUX interconnection block diagram
Site expansion is not restricted to using Horizon II macro or Horizon II mini or Horizon
II micro units as slaves. Horizonmacro and/or M-Cell6 (equipped with a FMUX) can
also be used. Similarly, the master BTS can be a Horizonmacro or FMUX-equipped
M-Cell6 with a Horizon II macro or Horizon II micro as one or more slaves.
Refer to Installation & Configuration: Horizon II macro (68P02902W97) , Installation

& Configuration: Horizon II mini (68P02903W22) or Installation & Configuration:
Horizon II micro (68P02903W32) for full details of BTS interoperability.
68P02902W96-E 5-19
Aug 2007
Site expansion board Chapter 5: Digital modules
Site expansion board

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The site expansion board is an optional module that is required only for site expansion:
• In the Horizon II macro cabinet one or two boards may be installed, depending on whether
redundancy is required.
• In a Horizon II mini cabinet or Horizon II micro enclosure only one board can be installed.
The primary function of the expansion board is to convert TTL signals to fiber optic signals (and
vice versa) to enable the master and slave cabinets to communicate with each other.
The board contains the following I/O connectors (see Figure 5-7):
• 6 x fiber optic connectors (three Tx/Rx (OUT/IN) pairs), for connecting up to three
expansion cabinets. Each fiber optic link is full duplex 16.384 Mbit/s and is capable of
driving up to 1 km.
• Optional 1 x 15-pin D-sub connector for GPS.
In Horizon II macro, redundancy is determined by the complement of HIISCs in the master

cabinet. If the master cabinet contains two HIISCs (1 + 1 redundant), two XMUXs must be
installed in each slave cabinet. Two site expansion boards are also required in the master
and in each slave cabinet.
5-20 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Site expansion board
View of site expansion board
Figure 5-7 Site expansion board
68P02902W96-E 5-21
Aug 2007
Alarm module Chapter 5: Digital modules
Alarm module
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Alarm module overview
The alarm module is located on the left side of the digital module shelf. It provides the cabinet
equipment with an external IAS alarm monitoring system to report operational status. The
alarm module:
• Collects all cabinet alarms (received from the backplane).
• Provides current sensing for 16 customer inputs (referred to as site alarms). These inputs
are provided by the PIX connectors PIX0 and PIX1.
• Controls up to four relay driven outputs linked to customer equipment (changeover

contacts 30 V 1 A maximum). These outputs are provided by the PIX0 connector.
• Transmits alarm information to all CTU2s in the same cabinet.
• Processes antenna VSWR monitor alarm signals.
The alarm module is not backwards compatible with the alarm module used in
Horizonmacro.
The external IAS alarm connector is not present in the new version of the cabinet.
5-22 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Alarm module
Alarm module view
Figure 5-8 shows an alarm module.
Figure 5-8 Alarm module view
Alarm module functionality
The alarm module receives inputs from:

• The external IAS alarm connector on the interface panel, (from the optional battery backup
system (the BBS)).
• Cabinet PSUs (identifying manufacturer code and slot number).
• Environmental control devices.
• Customer defined alarms.
• Antenna VSWR monitoring circuit within Tx blocks.

The alarm board receives these inputs, encodes them, and then passes the code word to all
CTU2s in the cabinet through the backplane.
68P02902W96-E 5-23
Aug 2007
Alarm module Chapter 5: Digital modules
Alarm module replacement - effect on alarms
The alarm module can be replaced while the cabinet system is running (hot swap). This will
temporarily interrupt alarms, with the OMC-R receiving an additional alarm module out of
service alarm, which automatically clears upon correct insertion of the replacement module.
Alarm collection from expansion cabinets
Alarms detected by the alarm module in an expansion cabinet are forwarded to the transceivers.
These then transmit the alarms to the HIISC in the master cabinet through the XMUX and site
expansion board in the expansion cabinet and the site expansion board in the master cabinet.
Alarm module display presentation
All alarm LEDs are green (OK) when equipment is functioning correctly or red (alarm) when
equipment is faulty. Table 5-2 shows the LED designations.
Table 5-2 Alarm module LEDs
LED Equipment monitored

Legend LED color states
location (Green=OK, Red=FAULT)
1 (top) MAINS Unlit/Red Not used.
2 RECTFR Unlit/Red Not used.
3 DOOR 1 Unlit/Red Cabinet door open alarm.
4 DOOR 2 Unlit/Red Not used.
5 LVD Unlit/Red Low voltage disconnect (LVD) alarm
(battery backup option).
6 FAN 0 Green/Red Fan Tray 0 fully operational (2-fan tray).
9 HMS 1 Unlit/Red Not used.
10 HMS 2 Unlit/Red Not used.
5-24 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Routine maintenance
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 6-1
Aug 2007
Routine maintenance overview Chapter 6: Routine maintenance
Routine maintenance overview

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
In this chapter
This chapter contains the procedures for the routine maintenance of a Horizon II macro Base
Transceiver Station (BTS).
Since a Horizon II macro BTS operates as part of a network, the procedures in this
chapter must be performed in conjunction with the relevant network procedures in
the associated OMC-R manuals. Before attempting any work on the cabinet, contact
the OMC-R to advise on the proposed activity.
Safety
• Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources are present in the cabinet
when the external AC mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or
batteries are connected. Remove rings, watches and jewelry before starting
these procedures, and exercise extreme caution when working on the equipment.
• Maintenance procedures on this equipment must only be carried out by suitably
qualied personnel.
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazards that
exist. All statements regarding safety within these routine maintenance procedures must be
adhered to when working on the equipment.
6-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Routine maintenance overview
Reporting faulty devices
During Routine Maintenance and FRU replacement procedures, it may be possible to identify
signs of damage that might indicate a problem that could repeat, cause additional damage, or
be a symptom of a failure elsewhere. Analysis of the problem may identify the fault and make
corrective action possible.
Whenever a safety issue arises:

• Inform the OMC-R that an equipment safety problem has been identified.
• Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.
• Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.
• Report the problem directly to GSM Customer Network Resolution Centre

+44 (0)1793 565444 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax
+44 (0)1793 430987 (fax).
• Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network
Resolution Centre.
• Seek local office advice.
Routine maintenance intervals
Routine maintenance for Horizon II macro installations is recommended at the intervals shown
in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Horizon II macro routine maintenance schedule
6 months 12 months 24 months

Ensure that cabinet air Annual check of the Inspect general mechanical
inlets, exhaust grilles and installation. condition of the cabinet.
filter (if fitted) are not
blocked.
Check normal operation, Inspect locks, handles, and hinges
including fans. Also cable of door. Lubricate if required.
–
integrity and state of all
connections.
These procedures are described in subsequent sections of this chapter. These cover the
following:
• Six monthly
• Twelve monthly
• Twenty—four monthly
68P02902W96-E 6-3
Aug 2007
Cleaning agents
The following is a list of cleaning and lubricant materials required for routine maintenance:
• Dustpan.
• Soft brush.
• Vacuum cleaner.
• Mild detergent.
• Deionized water.
• Soft cloth.
• Lubricant (WD40 or equivalent).
• Light grease (TBI or equivalent).
Tools
The only tools required are torque spanners, torque wrenches and torx drivers, as listed in
Installation & Configuration: Horizon II macro (68P02902W97). This manual is supplied with
the equipment.
Assumptions - door, hood, and stacking bracket
Any requirement to open a door, or remove a hood (if fitted), is assumed in all procedures.
Shutting the door, or replacing the optional hood is also assumed at the end of any procedure.
SURF2 and Tx block replacement is possible without having to remove the stacking bracket,
if one is fitted.
6-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Door opening/closing
The door lock is a trigger latch. Follow Procedure 6-1 to open and close the door.
Procedure 6-1 Opening and closing the cabinet door
1 Insert the correct key into the lock and turn.

2 Press the middle square panel by the lock to release the lock.
3 Open the door to the initial detente position at 95°.
Avoid damaging honeycomb door vent.
If the equipment is active, a door open alarm will be signalled

to the OMC-R.
4 To open the door to the maximum 150°, simply pull the door until it reaches
the limit of movement.
5 To close, simply push the door to the closed position and then lock.
Hood removal and retting
The optional hood is held in place by four pins. Remove by lifting the hood rear edge until
it is free of the pins, then lift off.
To fit the optional hood, align the hood to the back pins, lower hood onto the pins, and press
down firmly.
Stacking bracket removal
The stacking bracket is secured by eight M8 screws (including four which can be replaced by
pins if the optional hood is fitted). To remove or replace a stacking bracket, see Replacing
an optional stacking bracket on page 7-12.
68P02902W96-E 6-5
Aug 2007
Stacking bracket front cover removal and tting
The stacking bracket front cover is attached to the stacking bracket by four locating clips.
Follow Procedure 6-2 to remove and refit the cover.
Procedure 6-2 Removing and retting the stacking bracket front cover
1 Remove the stacking bracket front cover by applying gentle pressure to the
outer edges, while easing the cover up and pulling it away from the bracket
(See Figure 6-1).
2 To fit the front cover, first align the four locating clips on the cover with the
four square holes in the front of the stacking bracket. Ensure that the cut
out slot on each clip is facing downward.
3 Press the cover against the stacking bracket, so that the cut out slot on each
locating clip engages with the bottom edge of each square hole. It may be
necessary to gently push in and down to ensure the cut out slots are fully
engaged and the cover securely in place.
6-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Figure 6-1 Removing and tting the stacking bracket front cover
68P02902W96-E 6-7
Aug 2007
Visiting the site Chapter 6: Routine maintenance
Visiting the site

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the guidelines provided in this
section.
Before leaving for the site
Before leaving for the site, follow Procedure 6-3.
Procedure 6-3 Initial preparation for site visit
1 Ensure that team members have adequate test equipment, tools, and necessary
hardware to complete the tasks. Check for any special requirements.
2 Contact the person in charge of the site to advise of the team's estimated time
of arrival and the expected duration of their stay on the site. Usually the
logistics will have already been arranged, but it is good practice to check that
the information was received.
3 Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site as local
regulations may change.
Arrival at site
When entering any site, follow Procedure 6-4.
Procedure 6-4 Site entry procedure
1 Contact the communications site manager before entering the site. Obtain the
following information from the on-site contact:
• Local regulations.
• Parking instructions.
• Waste material removal or disposal instructions.
• Directions to canteen facilities (if available).

2 Enter the site.
3 Check for building alarms, for example, intruder alarms, that may have been
activated by entry. If fitted, disable the fire extinguishing systems, and any
alarms activated by entry.
4 Read any local instructions provided.
6-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Visiting the site
Leaving site
When leaving a site, follow Procedure 6-5.
Procedure 6-5 Site exit procedure
1 Enable the fire extinguishing system, if fitted, and any alarms that were disabled.
2 Contact the local site manager to announce the team's departure.
3 Sign out of the building as necessary.
Waste material on site
Clear waste material from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicated by the
customer.
Do not burn waste material, as packaging might give off toxic gasses.
Rural sites
It is the responsibility of the senior member of the team to ensure that all personnel on site are
aware of all applicable national and regional environmental regulations or codes of practice
and, especially with respect to water authority sites, any relevant health regulations.
Adhere to these points:

• Guard against all risk of fire.
• Fasten all gates (remember, site visits could be traced back if a complaint is made).
• Leave no litter.
• Drive carefully on country roads and observe speed restrictions at all times.
• Keep to the paths and tracks if crossing farm land.
68P02902W96-E 6-9
Aug 2007
Visiting the site Chapter 6: Routine maintenance
On site safety
The following safety guidelines are applicable to all members of the installation/maintenance
team and any visitors to the site.
All personnel must:

• Ensure that no-one moves heavy items without assistance. Equipment must be safely
positioned at all times.
• Wear safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is in progress, and when local
regulations require them.
• Wear safety goggles and dust masks when drilling. This is particularly important when
drilling overhead ironwork.
• Wear ear protectors while drilling is in progress.
• Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
Stop any work if anyone in the team is not properly protected, or is unaware of safety
requirements.
When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. This is to prevent
sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the locking edge.
6-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro 6-monthly maintenance procedures
6-monthly maintenance procedures

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Type of procedures
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-6 for the 6-monthly maintenance procedures.
Procedure 6-6 6–monthly maintenance procedure
1 Cleaning air inlets and exhaust grilles.

2 Examining and, if necessary, replacing the optional air filter.
Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources are present in the cabinet when
the external ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are
connected. Remove rings, watches and jewelry before starting these procedures, and
exercise extreme caution when working on the equipment.
Cleaning inlets and exhaust grilles
If the cabinet is operational, this maintenance procedure should be completed as

quickly as possible, in order to minimize duration of air cooling disruption.
Inlets are along the back, sides and front at the base of the cabinet. Air is expelled through the
door vent and through the top panel.
The Procedure 6-7 should be followed to clean inlet and outlet grilles.
Procedure 6-7 Cleaning inlets and exhaust grilles
1 Use a vacuum cleaner or brush to ensure the bottom inlets are clear of
debris.
2 Open the door and clean the aluminium door vent, taking care to avoid
damage.
68P02902W96-E 6-11
Aug 2007
12-monthly maintenance procedures Chapter 6: Routine maintenance

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Summary of 12-monthly procedures
The 12-monthly maintenance procedures is as described in Procedure 6-8.
Procedure 6-8 12–monthly maintenance procedure
1 Follow 6-monthly procedures.

2 Checking and cleaning fans.
3 Checking normal operation.
4 Annual check of the installation.
the AC mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected.
Remove rings, watches and jewelry before starting these procedures, and exercise
extreme caution when working on the equipment.
Checking and cleaning fans
If the cabinet is operational, this maintenance procedure should be completed as

quickly as possible in order to minimize duration of air cooling disruption.
There are three cabinet fan modules, all of which are identical 2-fan units. Table 6-2 shows the
three fan positions.
Table 6-2 Fan positions
Fan reference Unit type Cabinet position

0 2-fan unit Right side, beneath digital modules and CTU2 0.
1 2-fan unit Middle, beneath CTU2 1, 2 and 3.
2 2-fan unit Left side, beneath CTU2 3, 4 and 5.
6-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-9 to check and clean by the fans.
Procedure 6-9 Checking and cleaning fans
1 Remove the fan module by lifting the central slide latch and pulling out.
2 Use a brush and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt on the module.
3 Refit the fan and check operation.
4 Observe the fans through the grilles to ensure correct operation. Listen for
excessive noise. If there is excessive noise, identify the module responsible
and replace (See Replacing a fan unit on page 7-14).
Checking normal operation
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-10 to check normal operation by visual inspection.
Procedure 6-10 Checking normal operation
1 Inspect the inside of the cabinet and note any signs of physical damage,
overheating, loose connections, or badly fitting components. Take
appropriate action to correct the damage, and inform the OMC-R.
2 Ensure that the LEDs on modules shown in Table 6-3 are lit, this indicates
correct functioning of the cabinet. If any red LEDs are lit, other than the
door alarm (alarm 3 on the alarm module), inform the OMC-R.
Table 6-3 Normal LED indication of cabinet modules
Equipment with LEDs Color of LEDs lit

CTU2s Radio status (GREEN)
and Tx status (YELLOW).
PSUs Top LED on front panel GREEN.
Digital modules (HIISC Status LED GREEN.
or XMUX)
Alarm module LED 3 RED (because door is open).
LEDs 6, 7, 8 GREEN (fans).
68P02902W96-E 6-13
Aug 2007
Annual check of the installation
Follow the procedure described in Procedure 6-11 for annual check of the installation.
Procedure 6-11 Annual check of the installation
1 Check Power down cabinet.

2 Earth continuity check.
3 Power system insulation check.
4 Check of electricity company connection.
5 Pre-power up check of supply and earth connection security and condition.
6 Power up of cabinet.
7 Log the maintenance activity.
8 After procedures have been completed, restore the cabinet to operational
state and notify the OMC-R of base station availability.
Refer to Installation & Configuration: Horizon II macro (68P02902W97) to carry out

the above procedures.
6-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Summary of 24-monthly procedures
the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected.
Remove rings, watches and jewelry before starting these procedures, and exercise
extreme caution when working on the equipment.
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-12 for the 24-monthly maintenance procedures.
Procedure 6-12 Summary of 24–monthly procedures
1 Follow the 6-monthly procedures.

2 Follow the 12-monthly procedures.
3 Mechanical inspection of cabinet, including inspection and lubrication of
locks and hinges.
Mechanical inspection of cabinet, locks and hinges
The following must be performed every 24 months.
Inspecting the cabinet exterior
Use a step ladder or platform for access to a stacked cabinet, where necessary.
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-13 to inspect the cabinet exterior.
68P02902W96-E 6-15
Aug 2007
Procedure 6-13 Inspecting the cabinet exterior
1 Check exterior panels and hood/stacking bracket for dents and structural
damage.
2 Check cabinet top connections for signs of overheating and security of
attachment.
Inspecting the door
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-14 to inspect the door.
Procedure 6-14 Inspecting the door
1 Check the cabinet door for distortion, security and correct operation.
2 Check the hinges for damage, security and correct operation. Carefully
lubricate the hinges. Ensure that all door seals are wiped clean of the
lubricant.
3 Check the earth connection for damage and security.
4 Check the door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation. Lubricate
the mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfaces are
grit-free.
Inspecting the cabinet interior
Follow the steps described in Procedure 6-15 to inspect the cabinet interior.
Procedure 6-15 Inspecting the cabinet interior
1 Check all rack equipment for security of attachment, especially PSU, CBC
and CTU2 attachment screws using a torx driver. Tighten to the correct
torque (See Table 7-1 for torque values).
2 Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and security of
attachment.
Do not overstress the earth connections as this may damage the

connector and reduce the protective function.
3 Check the earth connections for corrosion and tightness using a torque
spanner. Tighten to the correct torque.
6-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
FRU replacement procedures

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 7-1
Aug 2007
Overview of replacement procedures Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Overview of replacement procedures

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Field replaceable units (FRUs)
• Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources are present in the cabinet
when the external isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are
connected. Remove rings, watches and jewelry before starting these procedures,
and exercise extreme caution when working on the equipment.
• Maintenance procedures on this equipment must only be carried out by suitably
qualied personnel.
This chapter provides information on the replacement of FRUs. Only those components classed
as FRUs are covered in this chapter.
• The following are assumed in procedures.

To open or close a door.
Remove and replace the optional hood.
• The following are assumed at the end of any procedures.

Shutting the door.
Replacing the hood.
SURF2 module and Tx block replacement may be carried out with a stacking bracket in
place. For door opening or stacking bracket front panel removal, refer to Chapter 6 Routine
maintenance Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on a FRU in order to save the cost
of full replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailed procedures or replacement
components (See Non-FRU components on page 7-5).
7-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Overview of replacement procedures
FRU list
The following is a list of FRUs used in the Horizon II macro:

• Door (see Replacing a door on page 7-7).
• Heat sensors (see Replacing a cabinet heat sensor on page 7-9).
• Optional hood (see Replacing an optional hood on page 7-10).
• Optional stacking bracket (see Replacing an optional stacking bracket on page 7-12).
• Fan units (see Replacing a fan unit on page 7-14).
• Power input module (see Replacing the power input module (PIM) on page 7-16).
• Circuit breaker card (see Replacing a circuit breaker card (CBC) on page 7-19).
• Power supply unit (see Replacing a power supply unit (PSU) on page 7-22).
• CTU2 (see Calibrating CTU2 bay level offset tables on page 7-46).
• SURF2 (see Replacing a SURF2 module on page 7-63).
• Optional SURF2 dual band adapter (see Replacing the optional SURF2 dual band adapter
on page 7-67).
• Tx blocks, including feedthrough plate (see Replacing a Tx block, HCU/DHU or plate

on page 7-69).
• Digital modules (HIISC, XMUX, site expansion board and alarm module) (see Digital
module replacement on page 7-75).
Torque values
Table 7-1 lists torque values to be used during replacement procedures.

Table 7-1 Cabinet screw/bolt and RF connector torque values (Nm)
Torque value
Size of screw/bolt
(in Nm)
M4 2.2
M6 3.4
M8 5
M10 10
SMA 1
N-type 3.4
7/16 25
68P02902W96-E 7-3
Aug 2007
Overview of replacement procedures Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
FRU cabinet locations
Figure 7-1 shows a fully equipped cabinet with FRUs identified. The door, optional hood and
stacking bracket are shown in the relevant FRU sections.
Figure 7-1 FRUs in the Horizon II macro cabinet (door and hood removed)
7-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Non-FRU components
Non-FRU components
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Policy on non-FRU components
Non-FRU components are:

• Items unlikely to fail, but replacement of which is essential if failure occurs.
or
• Sub-components of FRUs, where local conditions may make it more economical to repair
the FRU.
Only qualied personnel should attempt non-FRU component replacement, in order

to minimize risk of equipment damage. For example, the CBIA main cage requires
care in removal and installation, and Individual fans require care in ensuring correct
direction of airow.
List of non-FRU components
Non-FRU components include the following:

• Door lock.
• Individual fans within a fan module.
• Any part of the CBIA: main cage, harness, interface panel, or backplane.
Replacing non-FRU components
Customers wanting to replace non-FRU components should:

• Contact the local Motorola office for availability.
• Seek Motorola advice for fitting non-FRU components.
68P02902W96-E 7-5
Aug 2007
Non-FRU components Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
CBIA attachment screws
The CBIA is attached to the cabinet by screws which should not be loosened:
• Seven M4 screws to the SURF2 harness (two guide pins lock cage into position).
• Nine M6 screws on the front of the cabinet (five on the left side and four on the right side).
• Eight M4 T20 screws for interface panel attachment to the top panel.
7-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a door
Replacing a door
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to door replacement
The door is essential to the correct operation of the ventilation/cooling system. The door also
provides protection for the equipment contained inside. For these reasons, the replacement
procedure should be completed in one session, and the cabinet then secured.
Views of the door
Figure 7-2 shows an inside and outside view of the cabinet door.
Figure 7-2 Views of the cabinet door
68P02902W96-E 7-7
Aug 2007
Replacing a door Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Door replacement procedure
Removing a faulty door
Follow Procedure 7-1 to remove a faulty door.
Procedure 7-1 Removing a faulty door
1 Open the cabinet door.

2 On the cabinet, unscrew the M6 nut that secures the door
earth cable to the cabinet. Retain the nut for re-use.
3 Open the door to about 90° and then lift it off its hinges.
Fitting a replacement door
Follow Procedure 7-2 to fit a replacement door.
Avoid damaging the honeycomb door vent.
Procedure 7-2 Fitting a replacement door
1 Hold the door at about the 90° open position and lift onto the
door hinges.
2 Attach the door earth cable to the cabinet using the M6 nut.
Tighten to the correct torque (see Torque values on page 7-3).
3 Close the door and lock using the new key supplied with the door.
7-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a cabinet heat sensor
Replacing a cabinet heat sensor

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Overview of the heat sensors
The heat sensors plug into the backplane from the front, above the CTU2s. Each one can be
removed separately, and a replacement inserted. CTU2 2 and CTU2 3 are removed to gain
access for this procedure.
There is one 70°C sensor and two 85°C sensors. Each sensor is marked with the appropriate
temperature.
Heat sensor replacement procedure
Follow Procedure 7-3 to replace a heat sensor.
Before disconnecting RF cables, ensure that the RF power is OFF by turning off
the cabinet PSUs. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON when cables are
disconnected.
Procedure 7-3 Replacing a heat sensor
1 Remove CTU2 2 and CTU2 3 (see Calibrating CTU2 bay

level offset tables on page 7-46) to access the heat sensors.
2 Identify the faulty heat sensor and unplug it from the
backplane.
3 Insert the replacement heat sensor by pushing firmly into
place.
4 Refit CTU2 2 and CTU2 3 (see Calibrating CTU2 bay level
offset tables on page 7-46).
The heat sensors should now be operational.
68P02902W96-E 7-9
Aug 2007
Replacing an optional hood Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing an optional hood

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to hood replacement
This procedure assumes that the optional hood is already fitted, with hood pins located in
the correct cabinet locations. If the hood is to replace a stacking bracket, refer to Replacing
an optional stacking bracket on page 7-12 and the relevant section of Installation and
View of the hood
Figure 7-3 shows a hood mounted in position on top of the cabinet.
Figure 7-3 Hood, mounted in position
7-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing an optional hood
Replacing the hood
Follow the steps described in Procedure 7-4 to replace the hood.
Procedure 7-4 Replacing the hood
1 The hood is held in place by four pins. Remove the faulty hood
by lifting the rear edge, until it is free of the pins.
2 To fit the replacement hood, first align the hood to the rear
pins and then lower the hood onto the pins and press it firmly
into place.
68P02902W96-E 7-11
Aug 2007
Replacing an optional stacking bracket Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing an optional stacking bracket

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to stacking bracket replacement
This procedure assumes that the optional stacking bracket is already fitted in position on top
of the cabinet.
View of the stacking bracket
Figure 7-4 shows a stacking bracket.
Figure 7-4 Stacking bracket view
7-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing an optional stacking bracket
Stacking bracket replacement procedure
Follow Procedure 7-5 to replace the stacking bracket.
Procedure 7-5 Replacing the stacking bracket
1 Remove the front cover by pulling it away from the stacking bracket.
2 If an upper cabinet is fitted on top of the stacking bracket,
decommission and remove this cabinet, as described in the relevant
chapter of Installation and Configuration: Horizon II macro
(68P02902W97).
3 Loosen and remove the eight M8 screws that secure the stacking
bracket to the top of the cabinet.
The stacking bracket weighs 9.3 kg. Observe the correct

lifting precautions.
4 Lift the stacking bracket off the cabinet.
5 Align the replacement stacking bracket onto the top of the cabinet,
and fit the eight M8 screws. Tighten to the correct torque (See
Torque values on page 7-3).
6 If an upper cabinet was removed (step 4 above), install and
re-commission it (refer to Installation and Configuration: Horizon II
macro (68P02902W97)).
7 Refit the front cover by attaching it to the side lugs and pushing it
into position.
68P02902W96-E 7-13
Aug 2007
Replacing a fan unit Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing a fan unit

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to fan replacement
Any of the three fan units can be replaced while the cabinet is operational, but be aware that
airflow is reduced while fans are out of service and the door is open. This will raise equipment
temperature, and could shut down the cabinet by triggering the heat sensors.
View of the fan unit
Figure 7-5 shows a view of the fan unit fitted in a Horizon II macro cabinet.
Figure 7-5 View of the fan unit
7-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a fan unit
Identifying fan units
Figure 7-6 shows how the three fan units are identified in the cabinet.
Figure 7-6 Fan unit identication
Fan unit replacement procedure
Follow Procedure 7-6 to replace a fan unit.
If the cabinet is operational, Procedure 7-6 should be completed in the shorted

possible time to minimize the duration of air cooling disruption.
Procedure 7-6 Replacing a fan unit
1 Open the cabinet door.

2 Lift the central slide latch on the front of the fan unit that is to be
replaced.
3 Pull out the fan unit.
4 Insert the replacement unit and push into place, ensuring the slide
latch has engaged.
5 Ensure all fans are operating.
68P02902W96-E 7-15
Aug 2007
Replacing the power input module (PIM) Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing the power input module (PIM)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to PIM replacement
It is unlikely that the PIM will need replacing for any reason other than if the cabinet is to be
switched over from operating from a DC supply to an AC supply, or vice versa.
Changing the PIM from DC to AC or AC to DC will require that the PSUs are also
changed at the same time (See Replacing a power supply unit (PSU) on page 7-22).
Power Input Module (PIM) is not present in the new version of the cabinet.
7-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing the power input module (PIM)
View of the PIM
Figure 7-7 shows a detailed view of the DC PIM variant.
Figure 7-7 Power input module (PIM) - DC variant
68P02902W96-E 7-17
Aug 2007
Replacing the power input module (PIM) Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing the PIM
The procedure for replacing the PIM (Procedure 7-7) is basically the same for both types,
regardless of whether the existing and replacement PIM is DC or AC.
Procedure 7-7 Replacing the PIM
1 Verify that the power source isolator is switched to OFF and

locked (if possible).
2 Remove the cover to expose the power terminals.
3 Undo the M6 nuts and remove the cables from the terminals.
If changing the PIM from DC to AC or vice versa, completely
remove the cables from the cable run and lay the cables from the
new power source to the cabinet.
4 Undo the two M4 captive screws that secure the PIM in position
and then lift the PIM out of its housing.
5 Insert the new PIM into its housing and push fully home to ensure
that the connector on its base mates with the connector in the
bottom of the housing. Fit and tighten the two M4 Torx screws to
the correct torque.
6 If new power cables are being used (in cases when the PIM is
being changed from DC to AC or vice versa), fit the cone shaped
protective covers onto the power cables and then connect the
cables to the terminals on the new PIM. Tighten the M6 terminal
nuts to the correct torque (See Torque values on page 7-3).
7 Refit the power terminal cover.
8 If the PIM has been changed from DC to AC or vice versa, replace
the PSUs with those of the appropriate type (See Replacing a
power supply unit (PSU) on page 7-22).
7-18 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a circuit breaker card (CBC)
Replacing a circuit breaker card (CBC)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Preconditions for CBC replacement
The CBC controls power for the whole of the cabinet, apart from the PSUs. Consequently,
the replacement of a CBC can only take place after the cabinet has been taken out of service
and isolated, in agreement with the OMC-R.
68P02902W96-E 7-19
Aug 2007
Replacing a circuit breaker card (CBC) Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
View of the CBC
Figure 7-8 shows the CBC with circuit breaker buttons identified.
Figure 7-8 Circuit breaker card (CBC)
7-20 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a circuit breaker card (CBC)
Replacing the CBC
Follow Procedure 7-8 to replace the CBC and then follow Procedure 7-9 to restore power to
the cabinet after CBC replacement.
Procedure 7-8 Replacing the CBC
1 Verify that the power source isolator is switched to OFF, and locked (if
possible).
2 Set the switch of each PSU to the OUTPUT DISABLE position.
3 Unscrew both CBC module attachment screws using a T20 Torx driver.
4 Pull the CBC out of its slot in the cabinet.
5 Ensure that all circuit breaker buttons on the new CBC are set to the out
(OFF) position.
6 Slide the replacement CBC into its slot and press firmly into place.
7 Tighten both module attachment screws to the correct torque (See Torque
values on page 7-3) using a T20 Torx driver.
Follow the steps described in Procedure 7-9 to restore power to the cabinet after CBC
replacement.
Procedure 7-9 Restoring power to the cabinet after CBC replacement
1 Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.

2 Set each PSU switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position. Check that the ACTIVE
(green) LED is on and the ALARM (red) LED is off on each PSU.
3 Switch on the equipment in the cabinet by pressing the CBC isolator
push-buttons in the following sequence:
• FAN
Check that each fan (six in total) is operating correctly.
• SC0 and SC1 if fitted (or XMUX(s) if a slave cabinet).

Check that the appropriate HIISC/XMUX indicators operate correctly.
• SURF0 (and SURF1, if fitted).
• DUP
• CTU0 to CTUn (where n=1 to 5, depending

on the number of CTU2s installed).
Check that the front panel LEDs for each CTU2 indicate correct operation.
4 Close the door to ensure correct ventilation.
This completes the CBC replacement procedure and power up sequence for a cabinet.
68P02902W96-E 7-21
Aug 2007
Replacing a power supply unit (PSU) Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing a power supply unit (PSU)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to PSU replacement
There are four slots for PSUs in the cabinet. Three PSUs are required to power a fully equipped
cabinet. The fourth slot can be used for an additional power supply to provide redundancy.
A replacement PSU can be inserted into an available slot without powering down, thereby
avoiding any need to take the cabinet out of service.
Preconditions for PSU replacement
The replacement PSU must be of the correct type for the cabinet (+ 27 V DC, -48 V to 60 V
DC, or 120 V to 240 V AC).
The replacement PSU must have the correct input voltage rating for the cabinet.
7-22 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a power supply unit (PSU)
View of the PSU
Figure 7-9 shows a view of the PSU with key features identified.
Figure 7-9 PSU with key features identied
There are several manufacturers of the PSUs. All PSUs of the same type are fully
compatible with each other, regardless of manufacturer.
68P02902W96-E 7-23
Aug 2007
Replacing a power supply unit (PSU) Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing a non-redundant PSU
Use Procedure 7-10 if there are two or three PSUs installed in the cabinet.
Procedure 7-10 Replacing a non-redundant PSU
1 Set the switch of the replacement PSU to OUTPUT DISABLE.

2 Remove the blanking plate of the spare slot (if fitted) by unscrewing the
retaining screw with a Torx driver.
3 Insert the replacement PSU in the resulting available slot. Push the PSU all
the way in and secure in position by tightening the M4 retaining screw to the
correct torque using a Torx driver.
4 Set the output switch to OUTPUT ENABLE. Check that the ACTIVE LED
(green) illuminates.
5 Set the output switch of the faulty PSU to OUTPUT DISABLE. The ACTIVE LED
will extinguish (the ACTIVE LED may already be off if a fault has resulted in
output failure of that PSU). The ALARM LED (red) will illuminate, or will stay
on if already lit due to alarm state.
6 Undo the M4 retaining screw on the front of the faulty PSU module and pull the
module out of the cabinet using the handle. The ALARM LED will extinguish.
7 If required, fit the cover plate in the vacated PSU position and tighten the
retaining screw to the correct torque using a Torx driver.
Replacing a redundant PSU
Use Procedure 7-11 if there are four PSUs fitted.
Procedure 7-11 Replacing a redundant PSU
1 Set the switch on the replacement PSU to OUTPUT DISABLE.

2 Set the switch of the faulty PSU to OUTPUT DISABLE. The ACTIVE LED will
extinguish (the ACTIVE LED may already be off if a fault has resulted in
output failure of that PSU). The ALARM LED (red) will illuminate, or will stay
on if already lit due to alarm state.
3 Undo the M4 retaining screw on the front of the faulty PSU module and
pull the module out of the cabinet using the handle. The ALARM LED will
extinguish.
4 Insert the replacement PSU in the empty slot. Push the PSU all the way in
and secure in position by tightening the M4 retaining screw to the correct
torque using a Torx driver.
5 Set the front panel switch to OUTPUT ENABLE. Check that the ACTIVE LED
is lit.
7-24 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a CTU2
Replacing a CTU2
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The CTU2 handle and adjacent metal surfaces may be hot to touch.
Replacing the CTU2 requires removal of RF transmitter power for that CTU2; it is therefore
advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. The OMC-R should be notified
of imminent repair activity.
The CTU2 replacement procedure is the same for all CTU2s, regardless of frequency
rating:
• Ensure the replacement CTU2 is the same frequency rating as the faulty CTU2.
• Read the Preserving CTU2 calibration section later in this chapter prior to
removing the CTU2.
68P02902W96-E 7-25
Aug 2007
Replacing a CTU2 Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
View of a CTU2
Figure 7-10 CTU2 view with key features
7-26 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
CTU2 replacement procedure
The CTU2 transmit power, in Horizon II micro, is factory calibrated as a macro BTS
(up to: 60 W for PGSM900, 63 W for EGSM900 and 50 W for DCS1800, in single
density mode), prior to delivery.
Use the max_tx_bts parameter to ensure the maximum Tx power is correctly set
after CTU2 replacement. For example; if using standard power option, set value = 5
to 21, or high power option, set value = 0 to 21). See the chapter Site verication
procedures, for Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration, Tx
output power calibration procedure.
An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling CTU2s. An ESP earthing
connection point is provided at the top left of the front of the cabinet.
There are two stages to this procedure:

• Removing a faulty CTU2 on page 7-27.
• Fitting a replacement CTU2 on page 7-29.
Removing a faulty CTU2
Ensure that the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature is enabled and determine
which calibration data exchange scenario applies before proceeding further (refer to
Enabling the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature and CTU2 calibration procedures
in CTU2 calibration data exchange procedures respectively, later in this chapter).
If the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature is NOT enabled, for any reason. Perform
Site verication procedures, Tx output power calibration.
(up to: 60 W for PGSM900, 63 W for EGSM900 and 50 W for DCS1800, in single
density mode), prior to delivery.
68P02902W96-E 7-27
Aug 2007
Use the max_tx_bts parameter to ensure the maximum Tx power is correctly set
after CTU2 replacement. For example; if using standard power option, set value = 5
to 21, or high power option, set value = 0 to 21). See the chapter Site verication
procedures, for Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration, Tx
output power calibration procedure.
Procedure 7-12 CTU2 removal
1 Disable the CTU2 transmit RF power by using the lock_device or

shutdown_device command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the HIISC.
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference

(68P02901W23) for information on usage and specific commands.
2 When the CTU2 has been shutdown, check that the yellow Tx STATUS LEDs
are unlit.
3 Set the appropriate CTU2 circuit breaker to the OFF position or, if Horizon II
micro, the switch of the PSU to OUTPUT DISABLE. Ensure that the RADIO
STATUS LED is not lit
Ensure that RF power is OFF, before disconnecting RF cables. Severe

burns may result if RF power is ON when cables are connected or
disconnected.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the Tx OUT SMA connector at the top of the
CTU2 front panel.
4 Unscrew the two CTU2 attachment screws using a T20 Torx driver.
5
The CTU2 weighs 5 kg. Handle with care.
Take care to avoid damaging the CTU2 rear connectors when handling
outside of the cabinet.
Withdraw the CTU2 using the handle. Support the unit from underneath as
it slides out.
7-28 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Fitting a replacement CTU2
Ensure that the transmit RF power of the correct CTU2 has been locked using the
lock_device or shutdown_device command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to
the HIISC, if a CTU2 is being tted to an unused slot in Horizon II macro or Horizon II
mini.
Procedure 7-13 CTU2 replacement
1 Insert the replacement CTU2 module, taking care to locate the module on the
guide rails. Push firmly into place.
2 Tighten both module attachment screws to 2.2 Nm torque, using a T20 Torx
driver.
The Tx cable has a 90° SMA connector at one end, and a straight SMA
connector at the other end. The 90° end is designed for connection to
the Tx port of the CTU2.
3 Screw the 90° SMA connector of the coaxial cable onto the Tx OUT SMA
connector at the top of the CTU2 front panel. Tighten to the 1 Nm torque.
4 Set the appropriate CTU2 circuit breaker to the ON position or, if Horizon II
micro, the switch of the PSU to OUTPUT ENABLE. The RADIO STATUS LED will
flash green until the CTU2 is unlocked, and then remain lit.
5 Enable the CTU2 transmit RF power by using the unlock_device or ins_device
command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the HIISC. The appropriate
Tx STATUS LED (yellow) will be lit if the CTU2 is transmitting.
For an unlocked CTU2, if the RADIO STATUS LED is ashing green

or alternating red and green, boot code is downloading or ash
reprogramming is taking place. Do not remove power or reset the
cabinet until downloading has been completed as this will corrupt the
non-volatile memory.
If the boot code is corrupted, contact Motorola Customer Network

Resolution Centre requesting the boot code restoration procedure and
the appropriate boot code le.
6 Calibrate the CTU2 using the appropriate procedure, as described in CTU2
calibration data exchange procedures later in this chapter.
7 Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.
68P02902W96-E 7-29
Aug 2007
CINDY commissioning tool
Although not required, many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried
out automatically using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user
documentation for details.
7-30 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro CTU2 calibration data exchange scenarios
CTU2 calibration data exchange scenarios

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The process of uploading/downloading calibration data between the CTU2 and the CM database
is automatic, but the procedure used is determined by one of the scenarios described in
Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 CTU2 calibration scenarios and procedures
Scenario: Site initialization Procedure

Description
with... Used
Calibration data held in If a CTU2 malfunctions and has to be Preserve
the CM database, but replaced, the associated DRI is locked and CTU2
with invalid/no calibration the malfunctioning CTU2 replaced with a new calibration
data in the CTU2. CTU2 while the cell remains in service. The data.
(That is when a CTU2 DRI is then unlocked. When the executive
has been replaced with the message Radio standby Success is received
preserve calibration data by the CA at the BTS, the database is queried
feature enabled.) to determine if any valid offset data is
stored. If any is found in the database, this
is downloaded to the new CTU2 and the
CTU2 is allowed to come into service (B-U).
The CTU2 will flash the new calibration data
to keep a permanent copy, (so that a new CM
database can be repopulated after downloading
from the OMC-R.
Invalid/no calibration Once the CA at the BTS receives the executive CTU2
data held in the CM message Radio standby Success, it checks calibration.
database and no calibration the CM database for valid offsets. If none exist,
data in the CTU2. the BTS then queries the CTU2 for valid data. If
(That is when a CTU2 none exists in the CTU2, the CTU2 is brought
has been replaced without into service but the Invalid transceiver
the preserve calibration data calibration data alarm is triggered.
feature enabled.)
Invalid/no calibration Initially a CTU2 is calibrated and the antenna Preserve
data held in the CM offsets stored within the CTU2. When the BTS CTU2
database, but with valid initializes and enters call processing mode, calibration
calibration data in the CTU2. the Central Authority (CA) at the BTS queries data.
(That is when a CTU2 has Configuration Management (CM) to see if valid
been replaced without the offset data exists. If no valid data exists, in the
preserve calibration data CM database, then the CTU2(s) are queried for
feature enabled and has then the offset data, which is sent through the Radio
been calibrated.) Signalling Link (RSL) to the CM at the BSC.
Invalid/no calibration If an RF front end component malfunctions CTU2
data held in the CM and has to be replaced, the associated CTU2 recalibration
database and invalid is locked and the malfunctioning component and
calibration data in the CTU2. replaced with a new RF front end component Preserve
(That is when an RF front while the cell remains in service. The CTU2
end component has been calibration data must be cleared and the CTU2 calibration
replaced, for example: a recalibrated. The DRI is then unlocked. data.
SURF 2, Mini-SURF or a
duplexer.)
68P02902W96-E 7-31
Aug 2007
CTU2 calibration data exchange scenarios Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Test equipment required
The following equipment is needed to carry out the CTU2 calibration or recalibration procedures:
• An IBM compatible personal computer (PC).
• Terminal emulator software.
• A 9-way to 9-way cable (BTS).
• A 9-way to 25-way cable (BSC).
Commands used
Table 7-3 lists the commands required to carry out this procedure.
Table 7-3 CTU2 calibration commands
BTS Command Function

lock_device Prevents the device being used (see Note
below).
unlock_device Enables the device to be used (see Note
below).
OMC-R/BSC Command Function
store_cal_data Stores calibration data for all transceivers in
the master CM database at the BSC, which is
then used to update the CM database copy
at the BTS.
disp_cal_data
• When transceiver is locked: Displays
calibration data in the CM database for
the specified transceiver.
• When transceiver is unlocked: Displays

calibration data in the RAM of the
specified transceiver.
clear_cal_data Clears calibration data in the CM database at
the BSC and BTS for a specified transceiver.
• Use shutdown_device instead of lock_device if the CTU2 is currently active.

Use ins_device instead of unlock_device if shutdown_device was used to
lock the CTU2.
• If there is no RSL from the BTS to the BSC then a command will not be executed
by the BSC, as the BSC has no knowledge of the command being entered.
All calibration data is stored in the master CM database at the BSC, which is then used to
update the CM database copy at the BTS only if the data is valid.
7-32 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Preserving CTU2 calibration
Preserving CTU2 calibration

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section describes the preserve CTU2 transceiver calibration feature, which uses commands
to store, display and clear calibration data. This feature is used on busy systems where there is
a need to replace a CTU2 quickly and thus reduce system down time during peak hours.
Calibration data overview
This function enables malfunctioning CTU2s to be replaced without the need to remove the cell
from service. The calibration offsets can be displayed and cleared using the disp_cal_data
and clear_cal_data commands.
Display calibration offsets data
The disp_cal_data command only displays offsets from the CTU2 if the DRI is in the
busy-unlocked (B-U) state. The GPROC CM database values are displayed when the CTU2 is
locked or not busy. If the calibration values have been cleared and the CTU2 is disabled, they
will not be available on the specific RAM of the CTU2 or the CM database, and the response will
be NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE.
68P02902W96-E 7-33
Aug 2007
Preserving CTU2 calibration Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Store calibration data
The store_cal_data command sets a flag to indicate that the preserve calibration feature is
enabled. When the CTU2 is unlocked and comes into service, the calibration values will be
copied from the RAM in the CTU2 into the GPROC CM database. The values from the RAM in
the CTU2 will only be copied to the database if there are no calibration values in the GPROC CM
database, and if the CTU2 has valid calibration data to be copied.
If the GPROC CM database has calibration values for that specific CTU2, when the CTU2 is
unlocked it will get a copy of these values from the CM database. Different calibration values
for the same CTU2 can exist in the CM database and the RAM in the CTU2, only when the
CTU2 is in calibration mode.
Care has to be taken when calibrating a CTU2. To ensure that the values in the RAM of the
CTU2 and CM database have the same calibration data, the existing values have to be cleared
using the clear_cal_data command before a calibration can be successful and the correct
calibration data saved. Calibration data is stored in the master CM database at the BSC, and is
used to update the CM database copy at the BTS if it is valid.
Calibration values in the BSC CM database are lost if a new database is downloaded. In this case
the CM database will be repopulated from the calibration data held in the CTU2(s), provided
that the preserve calibration feature is enabled.
The store_cal_data command is a one off enable of the preserve calibration feature and
cannot, subsequently, be disabled by a command. Disabling the feature can only be achieved
by downloading a new database.
The value 0800H must be cleared from all the paths (columns of data) stored in the
CTU2, otherwise the calibration data will not be uploaded to the CM database.
Clear calibration data
The clear_cal_data command removes the offsets from RAM and the database. To clear the
data from a CTU2 that is B-U in the network, the command is issued after the CTU2 is locked. A
new CTU2 being put into the network must first be allowed to become B-U and then locked,
only after this will the command clear the calibration data for that CTU2. This is explained in
the calibration procedure.
7-34 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Preserving CTU2 calibration
Calibration data format from the CM database
The format of the calibration data output from the CM database is described here. This
information is provided in response to the command:
disp_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id> <device_id2> [<device_id3>]
For example:
disp_cal_data 63 dri 0 0 0
Where: is:
63 site
dri dri device
0 first dev_id
0 second dev_id
0 third dev_id
System response:
DRI ID: 0 0 0
Data read from database
Store Calibration Data: enabled
Calibration Data (All values in Hex):
Transmit Power Offsets = 0
Receive System Data:
Antenna Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
---------------------------------------------
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
e80, e80, e80, e80, e80, e80
68P02902W96-E 7-35
Aug 2007
Preserving CTU2 calibration Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
The second line of the system response indicates whether the data is read from
the CTU2 or the database. In the example above the information is read from the
database.
The number of rows of offset calibration data are as follows:

• EGSM900 - 22.
• PGSM900 – 22 (same number as EGSM with default data stored in EGSM frequencies).
• GSM1800 - 47.
7-36 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Enabling the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature
Enabling the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Determine the BSC/BTS configuration and cage slot allocation before starting any of the
calibration data exchange procedures.
• The preserve CTU2 calibration data feature must be enabled at either the
OMC-R or the BSC, otherwise none of the calibration data exchange procedures
described in Table 7-2 will work.
• Calibration data is interchangeable between the Horizon II equipment CTU2s
and the Horizonmacro CTUs. This means that a CTU2 can be inserted in a
Horizonmacro cabinet and the original CTU calibration data used.
Enabling the preserve feature at the OMC-R
Procedure 7-14 Enabling the preserve feature at the OMC-R
1 Log in to the required base site controller (BSC) at the OMC-R man-machine
interface (MMI).
2 To initiate the preserve feature type:
store_cal_data <site_id>
Once the store_cal_data command has been used to enable the

preserve calibration feature there is no requirement to reissue this
command, unless a new database has been downloaded.
All calibration data will be stored in the master CM database at the BSC, which is then used to
update the CM database copy at the BTS (if the data is valid).
68P02902W96-E 7-37
Aug 2007
Enabling the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Enabling the preserve feature at the BSC
Procedure 7-15 Enabling the preserve feature at the BSC
1 Connect the 9-way to 25-way cable from the PC serial A port to the BSP TTY port.
2 At the PC start the terminal emulator program.
3 At the MMI prompt, enter the appropriate level change command and passwords.
4 At the MMI prompt type:
store_cal_data <site_id>
Once the store_cal_data command has been used to enable the

preserve calibration feature there is no requirement to reissue this
command, unless a new database has been downloaded.
7-38 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro CTU2 calibration data exchange procedures
CTU2 calibration data exchange procedures

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The procedures listed in Table 7-2 are described here in detail. All three procedures assume
that the preserve CTU2 calibration data feature (described previously) has been enabled.
Preserve CTU2 calibration data procedure
To replace a CTU2 using preserved calibration data, follow the procedures for CTU2
replacement given previously in this chapter.
This procedure assumes that the store_cal_data command has been used on the
CTU2 at some time previously while it was operational.
If valid calibration data stored in the CM database and invalid/no calibration data is stored in
the CTU2, then valid data is automatically downloaded into the RAM of the new CTU2. The data
is also stored in the non-volatile CTU2 memory.
If invalid/no calibration data stored in the CM database and valid calibration data is stored in
the CTU2, then valid data is automatically uploaded to the CM database.
CTU2 calibration procedures
This procedure is used to put a new CTU2 into service. If recalibration of a working CTU2 is
required, use the CTU2 recalibration procedures provided later in this chapter.
This covers EGSM and PGSM for 900 MHz as specified.

• Procedure 7-16 Calibrating the CTU2 on page 7-40.
• Procedure 7-17 Checking the CTU2 calibration on page 7-41.
68P02902W96-E 7-39
Aug 2007
CTU2 calibration data exchange procedures Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Calibrating the CTU2
The CTU2 requires a code load prior to the calibration process. Wait until
the CTU2 finishes the code load and stops flashing (in BUSY-UNLOCKED or
ENABLED-UNLOCKED state) before proceeding.
Procedure 7-16 Calibrating the CTU2
1 Lock all the DRIs in the same sector of the CTU2 to be calibrated. Always lock
the CTU2 providing the BCCH last, as this prevents the BCCH switching
to an alternative CTU2. Enter the following command for each of the DRIs.
lock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2 [<device_id3>]
2 Unlock the CTU2 to be calibrated.
3 Carry out bay level and Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR)
calibration procedures, as described in the relevant section of this manual.
Record the data.
4 Display the data in the CM database for the CTU2 that has been calibrated:
disp_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
5 Clear the data for the CTU2 to be calibrated:
clear_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
6 Confirm the data has been cleared from the CM database for the specified CTU2:
NO DATA AVAILABLE
If there is a different response, ensure the CTU2 is in the LOCKED

state and carry out from step 4 again.
7 Use the reset_device command to bring the calibrated radio into service.
7-40 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Checking the CTU2 calibration
If the DRI does not become B-U because of the error, Tx Power Unachievable,
please refer to the Tx output power calibration section of this document.
Procedure 7-17 Checking the CTU2 calibration
1 Unlock the DRI of the calibrated CTU2.
Ensure the previous calibration data has been cleared before

unlocking the CTU2.
Enter the command:

unlock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
Check that the calibrated CTU2 passes into BUSY-UNLOCKED state. The new
calibration data is uploaded to the CM database and is then used to update
the copy at the BTS.
2 Check the calibration data of the DRI of the calibrated CTU2 against the values
noted in step 3 of the previous procedure.
Allow one minute after uploading for the values in the CM database
at the BSC to be updated.
Enter the command:

The values seen should match the previous ones.
If the CTU2 is BUSY-UNLOCKED the data can be read directly from

the CTU2. In ENABLED-UNLOCKED or LOCKED state calibration
data is read from the CM database.
3 Make test calls in all timeslots of the new DRI to check audio quality and then
lock the tested DRI using the command:
lock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-41
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-17 Checking the CTU2 calibration (Continued)

4 With the CTU2 LOCKED, ensure the calibration process
has been carried out correctly by checking that the CM
database at the BSC has been updated with the new values.
Enter the command:
If the values seen match the previous ones go to step 6.
If not go to step 5.
5 If the BSC database indicates
NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE:
• Issue the command: store_cal_data <site_id>
• Unlock the DRI, using the command: unlock_device <site_id> DRI

<device_id1>
• Wait one minute for the BSC data to upload
• Lock the DRIs, using the command: lock_device <site_id> DRI

<device_id1>
• Repeat from step 4

6 If everything is in order, the cell can be put back into service. Unlock all the
DRIs in the same sector that were locked previously, using the command:
unlock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2 [<device_id3>]
CTU2 recalibration procedures
This procedure is used to recalibrate a working CTU2 when there is invalid or no calibration
data held in the CM database, and invalid calibration data is present in the CTU2.

• Recalibrating the CTU2 on page 7-43.
• Checking the CTU2 recalibration on page 7-43.
7-42 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Recalibrating the CTU2
Procedure 7-18 Recalibrating the CTU2
1 Lock all the DRIs in the same sector of the CTU2 to be calibrated. Always lock
the CTU2 providing the BCCH last, as this prevents the BCCH switching
to an alternative CTU2. Enter the following command for each of the DRIs.
lock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2 [<device_id3>]
2 Unlock the CTU2 to be calibrated.
calibration procedures, as described in the relevant section of this manual.
Record the data.
4 Display the data in the CM database for the CTU2 that has been calibrated:
5 Clear the data for the CTU2 to be calibrated:
clear_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
6 Confirm the data has been cleared from the CM database for the specified CTU2:
NO DATA AVAILABLE
If there is a different response, ensure the CTU2 is in the LOCKED

state and carry out from step 4 again.
7 Use the reset_device command to bring the calibrated radio into service.
Checking the CTU2 recalibration
68P02902W96-E 7-43
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-19 Checking the CTU2 recalibration
1 Unlock the DRI of the recalibrated CTU2.
Ensure the previous calibration data has been cleared before

unlocking the CTU2.
Enter the command:

unlock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
Check that the recalibrated CTU2 passes into UNLOCKED state. The new
calibration data is uploaded to the CM database and is then used to update the
copy at the BTS (even if the DRI does not have an RTF assigned).
2 Check the calibration data of the DRI of the recalibrated CTU2 against the
values noted in step 3 of the previous procedure.
Allow one minute after uploading for the values in the CM database
at the BSC to be updated.
Enter the command:

The values seen should match the previous ones.
If the CTU2 is BUSY-UNLOCKED the data can be read directly from

the CTU2. In ENABLED-UNLOCKED or LOCKED state calibration
data is read from the CM database.
3 Lock the tested DRI using the command:
lock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1>
4 With the CTU2 LOCKED (or in ENABLED-UNLOCKED state), ensure the
recalibration process has been carried out correctly, by checking that
the CM database at the BSC has been updated with the new values.
Enter the command:
If the values seen match the previous ones go to step 6.
If not go to step 5.
Continued
7-44 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-19 Checking the CTU2 recalibration (Continued)

5 If the BSC database indicates
NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE:
• Issue the command:store_cal_data <site_id>
• Unlock the DRI, using the command:unlock_device <site_id> DRI

<device_id1>
• Wait one minute for the BSC data to upload.
• Lock the DRIs, using the command: lock_device <site_id> DRI

<device_id1>
• Repeat from step 4.

6 If everything is in order, the cell can be put back into service. Unlock all the
DRIs in the same sector that were locked previously using the command:
unlock_device <site_id> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2 [<device_id3>]
68P02902W96-E 7-45
Aug 2007
Calibrating CTU2 bay level offset tables Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Calibrating CTU2 bay level offset tables

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Follow this procedure to calibrate the bay level offset tables to compensate for the losses or
gains due to preselectors and RF cabling from the antenna inputs to the CTU2 input.
All units are factory calibrated. This procedure is thus necessary only if one of the following
changes occur:
• RF front end equipment is changed.
• The site is reconfigured.
• High power duplexers are fitted.
The procedures contained in Calibrating CTU2 bay level offset tables are to calibrate
a single CTU2. Repeat the procedures for each CTU2 affected by the changes listed
above.
The following test equipment is required:

• A 50 ohm 100 W dummy load.
• A signal generator (0 to 2 GHz).
• A 9-way to 9-way HIISC/CTU2 cable.
• A 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS CTU2 cable.
When using test equipment observe the following points:
• All test equipment and test leads must be calibrated annually by a recognized
laboratory.
• Test equipment and test leads must not be calibrated in the eld.
• Do not optimize Motorola cellular base stations with test equipment that is
beyond its calibration due date.
• Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes before use.
7-46 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Calibrating CTU2 bay level offset tables
Commands used
Table 7-4 details the MMI commands that must be used to carry out the procedure:
The symbol 0 used in the commands in this procedure is a zero.
Table 7-4 MMI commands for CTU2 Rx bay level offset calibration
BSS MMI command Function

ins_device Initializes the device, bringing it into service.
lock_device Prevents the device being used.
unlock_device Frees the device for further use.
clear_cal_data Clears previously stored calibration data for a
specified radio unit on a per DRI basis.
chglev Changes the DSP MMI security level.
cal_test_mode on Enter calibration test mode.
fm test_mode on Puts the DSP fault management module in
test mode.
fm_test block none 0xff Blocks all DSP fault management alarms.
set carrier cara Switches DSP MMI control to carrier A.
set_carrier carb Switches DSP MMI control to carrier B.
ts a txp 0xff Turns off Tx closed loop power control for the
current carrier.
cal_config rx_cab_antennas Configures which carriers will be calibrated
by the Rx cabinet calibration procedure.
cal_config rf_band p900 Override for PGSM Only Duplexer.
cal_cabinet rx_cab Executes the Rx cabinet calibration procedure.
cal_store_1 Stores the calibration data.
ts a rx_br_sel 2 Sets the second carrier to Rx double density
mode so that the calibration procedure is
effective for both branches and both carriers.
cal_status tall Displays: the flash retrieval status, the
datapool valid flag and the checksum for all
calibration datapools.
disp_act_alarm Displays active alarms at the specified site.
disp_cal_data When transceiver is locked:
Displays calibration data in the CM
database for the specified transceiver.
When transceiver is unlocked:
Displays calibration data in the RAM of
68P02902W96-E 7-47
Aug 2007
Commands in the procedures in this section are frequently presented in the format: Command
<site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
Where: is:
<site_id> the number of the site logged into.
<cell_id> the antenna/relative cell number (0
to 5 for Horizon II macro), (0 to 1 for
Horizon II mini) or (0 for Horizon II
micro).
<DRI_number> DRI number of the transceiver.
Preparation for Rx bay level calibration
The RF path has to be prepared for bay level calibration. All DRIs in the site must be locked,
the CTU2 has to be reset, a dummy load must be connected if there is no antenna, and all
alarms must be disabled.
In the Horizon II macro, a transceiver may consist of one or two DRIs. If a CTU2 is configured
for double density mode (two DRIs), Tx cabinet calibration needs to be performed only on the
first DRI because the internal difference value keeps the power of the second carrier equal
to the first.
The internal difference value is not visible through the MMI command, and the TX
offset reported by disp_cal_data for the second DRI is a copy of the value for the first
DRI. Dual carrier calibration can verify that both carriers transmit at equal power.
The following will determine whether a CTU2 is configured as single or double density
transceiver and which DRI numbers correspond to which CTU2s.
At the BSC TTY, change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt type the following:
disp_eq <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
For single density CTU2s the output will look similar to the following:
[05/02/03 14:42:37] MMI-RAM 0115 -> disp_eq 81 dri 0 0

DRI identifier: 0 0
DRI Density[dri_density]: SINGLE
Cabinet identifier: 0
Type of connection to the BTP: MASTER
Port to which the TCU is connected[tcu_port]: 0
RTF identifier[pref_rtf_id]:
GSM cell ID where the DRI appears: 001 01 1 91
Antenna select number for this cell[antenna_select]: 1
7-48 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Tuneable combining used: No

The diversity flag for this DRI is[diversity_flag]: 0
The fm cell type is[fm_cell_type]: 0
For double density CTU2s the output will look similar to the following:

DRI identifier: 0 1
DRI Density[dri_density]: DOUBLE
Associated DRI identifier: 0 2
In this case we see that DRI 0 1 is a double density CTU2 and is associated with DRI 0 2.
Repeating the command for DRI 0 2 yields the following:

DRI identifier: 0 2
DRI Density [dri_density]: DOUBLE
Cabinet identifier: 0 Type of connection to the BTP: MASTER
Port to which the TCU is connected [tcu_port]: 1
RTF identifier [pref_rtf_id]:
Antenna select number for this cell [antenna_select]: 1
The diversity flag for this DRI is [diversity_flag]: 0
The fm cell type is [fm_cell_type]: 0
Thus, in this example, DRI 0 1 and DRI 0 2 are on the same CTU2.
In the case of the single density CTU2, cabinet calibration will be performed once on the DRI.
In the case of the double density CTU2, cabinet calibration is still performed on only one of the
two DRIs, but the other DRI must be locked for the procedures to be carried out. Furthermore,
the clear_cal_data commands must be issued for both DRIs.
68P02902W96-E 7-49
Aug 2007
Rx bay level calibration procedure
There are three stages to the Rx bay level calibration procedure. To calibrate each CTU2,
complete the following procedures.
• Procedure 7-20 Rx bay level calibration test equipment connection on page 7-50.
• Procedure 7-21 Rx bay level calibration test configuration on page 7-51.
• Procedure 7-22 Rx bay level calibration and calibration data storage on page 7-54.
To connect the test equipment to each CTU2, proceed as follows:
Follow the steps described in Procedure 7-20 to check Rx bay level calibration test equipment
connection.
Procedure 7-20 Rx bay level calibration test equipment connection
1 Connect the 9-way to 9-way HIISC cable from the PC serial A port to the
HIISC TTY port.
2 At the PC, start the terminal emulator program.
3 Lock all DRIs in the sector. At the HIISC TTY, change to Level 3 and at the
MMI-RAM>
prompt type
lock_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
Always lock the transceiver providing the BCCH last as this prevents
the BCCH being switched to alternate transceivers.
Continued
7-50 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-20 Rx bay level calibration test equipment connection (Continued)

4 If a Tx antenna is not connected to the transceiver under test, connect a 50
ohm 100 W dummy load to the Tx port.
5 Unlock the CTU2 to be calibrated. Change to Level 3 and at the
MMI-RAM>
prompt type:
ins_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
In the case of a double density CTU2, Rx cabinet calibration only

needs to be performed on one of the two DRIs. The other DRI must
remain locked.
6 Connect a serial port on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the CTU2 to be
calibrated using the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable. If necessary, switch
the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable from providing RSS connectivity to
providing DSP connectivity.
Follow Procedure 7-21 to configure each CTU2 for test.
Procedure 7-21 Rx bay level calibration test conguration
1 At the
DSP MMI>
prompt type
chglev
Then enter the following password:
pizza
2 Enter calibration test mode and disable alarms
by typing the following commands:cal_test_mode on
fm test_mode on
fm_test block none none 0xff
3 If required, set the second carrier to Rx double density mode by typing the
following command
ts a rx_br_sel 2
This enables the calibration procedure to take effect on both branches and both
carriers.
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-51
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-21 Rx bay level calibration test conguration (Continued)

4 Turn the CTU2's transmitters off by typing the following at the
DSP MMI>
prompt:
set_carrier cara
ts a txp 0xff
set_carrier carb
ts a txp 0xff
set_carrier cara
The response at the
DSP MMI
should be:
CTU2.carA.ts_0>
5 Set the quad diversity by entering the following command at the
DSP MMI>
prompt:
cal_config quad_diversity yes
The response at the
DSP MMI
should be:
Setting quad diversity to ON
The command is valid only if 4 branch Rx diversity is enabled in the

load and within the DRI, the diversity_flag is set to 2.
6 Configure which Rx antennas are to be calibrated using the following command:
cal_config rx_cab_antennas <antenna> <antenna>
<antenna> <antenna> <antenna><antenna>
Where <antenna> is one of the following:
• all - All antennas.
• 0a - Antenna 0A.
• 1a - Antenna 1A.
• 2a - Antenna 2A. *
• 0b - Antenna 0B.
Continued
7-52 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-21 Rx bay level calibration test conguration (Continued)
• 1b - Antenna 1B.
• 2b - Antenna 2B. *
• 0c- Antenna 0C. *
• 1c - Antenna 1C. *
• 2c - Antenna 2C. *
• 0d - Antenna 0D. *
Up to twelve antenna options can be specified, separated by spaces. The
option all is equivalent to 0A 1A 2A 0B 1B 2B 0C 1C 2C 0D 1D 2D.
For example, to calibrate antennas 0A and 0B, type the following command:
cal_config rx_cab_antennas 0a 0b
The response will be:
Setting RX Cabinet Calibration antennas to: 0A 0B.
To calibrate all antennas, type the following command:

cal_config rx_cab_antennas all
The response will be:
Setting RX Cabinet Calibration antennas to: All
*Antenna connections 2A, 2B, and 0C to 2D are applicable to Horizon

II macro only.
Antennas 0C - 2D correspond to the antenna inputs on the rear SURF2 module.

The C antennas are the A antenna positions on the rear SURF2 and the D
antennas are the B antenna positions on the rear SURF2.
Antennas 0C - 2D will be ignored by the calibration routine unless

the cabinet has a rear SURF2 module and is configured for 4 Branch
Rx Diversity.
68P02902W96-E 7-53
Aug 2007
Follow the Procedure 7-22 to calibrate the Rx bay level for each CTU2.
Procedure 7-22 Rx bay level calibration and calibration data storage
900 MHz radios take the EGSM RF band from the EID by default.
If PGSM duplexers are tted, the radio needs to be congured for
the PGSM band.
To set the RF band to PGSM900 enter the following command:

cal_config rf_band p900
The following message will be displayed on the screen:
Setting RF band to PGSM900

2 Start the Rx cabinet calibration procedure by typing the following command
at the
DSP MMI >
prompt.
cal_cabinet rx_cab
The following message will be displayed on the screen. This includes

the SURF2, or Mini-SURF, antenna connector to which the
signal generator should be connected (shown in bold text).
cal_cabinet rx_cab
Enabling receive
[c A, b 0] Setting RX diversity switch to double density
(inject carrier A into carrier B)
Enabling transmit
Number of frequency groups=47
Please connect the signal generator to branch 0A

Press return when the signal generator is connected.
Press any key to continue
Continued
7-54 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-22 Rx bay level calibration and calibration data storage (Continued)
3 When the signal generator is connected to the appropriate SURF2, or
Mini-SURF, antenna connector and configured, press ENTER at the
DSP MMI >
prompt.
The on screen instructions will list the new signal generator

settings required (shown in bold in the sample output below).
Please set the signal generator to

POWER -65.2000 dBm
FREQ 1710.8052 MHz
Be sure to allow for any loss in the cables connecting the signal generator to
the antenna connector. For example, if the cables have a loss of 1.5 dB and
you are asked to provide -65.2 dBm, set the signal generator to -63.7 dBm.
Make the appropriate adjustments and then press ENTER. The readings for
each test frequency will look something like the following:
IQ average reading C0B0: 2565696, 0x00272640

IQ average reading C1B0: 2762909, 0x002a289d
Measured gain: 14.76 (0x0ec2)
Measured gain: 15.69 (0x0fb0)
Frequency group 2 of 47
Please set the signal generator to
POWER -65.2000 dBm
FREQ 1712.4052 MHz
4 Repeat the calibration procedure in step 3 for all the appropriate test
frequencies, listed in Table 7-5 on page 7-56 for EGSM900 and PGSM900,
and Table 7-6 on page 7-57 for GSM1800 in Test frequency tables on page
7-56, (22 for EGSM, 16 for PGSM and 47 for DCS1800).
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-55
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-22 Rx bay level calibration and calibration data storage (Continued)
5 Once all frequencies have been calibrated, the program will request the signal
generator is moved to the next SURF2 or Mini-SURF antenna connection
(Refer to example message in step 2 of this procedure).
6 Repeat step 3 to step 5, of this procedure, for each antenna connection, until
all frequencies on all antennas have been calibrated.
7 Type the following command at the
DSP MMI>
prompt when the calibration procedure has been completed.

cal_store_1
After a few seconds delay (up to 16 seconds), the result of the data storage is
displayed on the screen in the format:
cal_store_1
PASS
CTU2.carA.ts_0>
8 Take the CTU2 out of test mode by entering the following command:
fm test_mode off
9 Connect to the BSC MMI and enter the following command to lock the CTU2
that has been calibrated:
10 Clear the calibration data for both DRIs using the following command:
clear_cal_data <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
The clear_cal_data command clears all calibration data out of the CM
database. This is required to override the preserve calibration feature, if
enabled.
To calibrate additional CTU2s in the same Horizon II base station, move the 9-way to 9-way DSP
MMI/RSS cable to the CTU2 TTY port of the next CTU2 to be calibrated and repeat the three Rx
bay level calibration procedures from step 4 of Procedure 7-20.
Test frequency tables
The EGSM900, PGSM900 and DCS1800, and channel numbers and test frequencies are listed in
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 on page 7-57: PGSM subset denoted with asterisks.
Table 7-5 EGSM900 and PGSM900 test frequencies
Channel Frequency (MHz) Channel Frequency (MHz)

978 880.8052 43* 898.4052
986 882.4052 51* 900.0052
994 884.0052 59* 901.6052
1002 885.6052 67* 903.2052
1010 887.2052 75* 904.8052
Continued
7-56 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Table 7-5 EGSM900 and PGSM900 test frequencies (Continued)

1018 888.8052 83* 906.4052
03* 890.4052 91* 908.0052
11* 892.0052 99* 909.6052
19* 893.6052 107* 911.2052
27* 895.2052 115* 912.8052
35* 896.8052 123* 914.4052
Table 7-6 GSM1800 test frequencies

515 1710.8052 707 1749.2052
523 1712.4052 715 1750.8052
531 1714.0052 723 1752.4052
539 1715.6052 731 1754.0052
547 1717.2052 739 1755.6052
555 1718.8052 747 1757.2052
563 1720.4052 755 1758.8052
571 1722.0052 763 1760.4052
579 1723.6052 771 1762.0052
587 1725.2052 779 1763.6052
595 1726.8052 787 1765.2052
603 1728.4052 795 1766.8052
611 1730.0052 803 1768.4052
619 1731.6052 811 1770.0052
627 1733.2052 819 1771.6052
635 1734.8052 827 1773.2052
643 1736.4052 835 1774.8052
651 1738.0052 843 1776.4052
659 1739.6052 851 1778.0052
667 1741.2052 859 1779.6052
675 1742.8052 867 1781.2052
683 1744.4052 875 1782.8052
691 1746.0052 883 1784.4052
699 1747.6052
68P02902W96-E 7-57
Aug 2007
Site restoration
After the bay level calibration is completed, restore the site by the following procedure.
Procedure 7-23 Post Rx bay calibration site restoration
1 Remove the signal generator and dummy load and reconnect the site RF cables.
2 Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU2
and connect to the HIISC TTY port.
3 Type:
reset_device <site_id> dri <Cell_id> <DRI_identity> 0
The CTU2 is now in the BUSY-UNLOCKED state.
4 Type:
disp_act_alarm <site_id> dri <Cell_id> <DRI_identity> 0
Confirm that there is no DRI 218 alarm. If there is a DRI 218 alarm, redo the
whole bay level calibration procedure.
5 Remove the 9-way to 9-way cables from the HIISC TTY port and connect to
the TTY interface port on the CTU2.
6 At the DSP MMI prompt type:
chglev
pizza
(this is a password and appears on screen as *****).
7 Verify the calibration result and datapool valid flag by typing
cal_status tall
at the command line and comparing with the
Example of calibration status on page 7-60.
Confirm that the Result and Valid Checksum values are pass and valid,
respectively, for both RX CAB A and RX CAB B.
Continued
7-58 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-23 Post Rx bay calibration site restoration (Continued)
If these values are incorrect the appropriate calibration must be

repeated.
8 Verify the antenna calibration data or transmit power offset by typing
at the command line and comparing with the Example
of calibration data format (for antenna 0) on page 7-61.
Confirm that the values for those antennas calibrated are not e80
If the entire row for a calibrated antenna is e80 this antenna must
be calibrated again.
9 Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU2.
68P02902W96-E 7-59
Aug 2007
Example of calibration status
Entering the cal_status tall command will give a result similar to the example below:
System response:
CTU2.carA.ts_0>cal_status tall
Cal Ca Br Status Result Valid.Checksum Ver S/HC
---------------------------------------------------------------------
RF Lop A 0 pass valid 0x0672d5b5 1 / 1
RF Lop B 0 pass valid 0x0d7b5025 1 / 1
RX RF A 0 pass valid 0x2ae0b9fc 1 / 1
RX RF A 1 pass valid 0x2bb91f4a 1 / 1
RX RF B 0 pass valid 0x2c1ed905 1 / 1
RX RF B 1 pass valid 0x2b063b6b 1 / 1
RX IF A 0 pass valid 0xc8bc3caf 1 / 1
RX IF A 1 pass valid 0xc8d99f37 1 / 1
RX IF B 0 pass valid 0xc8dadb3f 1 / 1
RX IF B 1 pass valid 0xc8bfbd0a 1 / 1
RX FR A 0 pass valid 0xa8fe3af6 1 / 1
RX FR A 1 pass valid 0xa8e8ba39 1 / 1
RX FR B 0 pass valid 0xa8fb5db7 1 / 1
RX FR B 1 pass valid 0xa8f593e0 1 / 1
RX CAB A 0 pass valid 0x53703256 0 / 1
RX CAB B 0 pass valid 0x45562835 0 / 1
TX VVA A 0 pass valid 0xb0be7eb2 1 / 1
TX VVA B 0 pass valid 0x96686359 1 / 1
TX DSA A 0 pass valid 0x01a775df 1 / 1
TX DSA B 0 pass valid 0x01a7863a 1 / 1
TX FP A 0 pass valid 0x09e81286 1 / 1
TX FP B 0 pass valid 0x07c8ee22 1 / 1
TX Ver A 0 pass valid 0x064b1162 1 / 1
TX Ver B 0 pass valid 0x063b5e9a 1 / 1
TX CAB A 0 pass valid 0x019e2da9 1 / 1
TX CAB B 0 pass valid 0x01bd2da9 1 / 1
PA Det A 0 pass valid 0x15cc24be 1 / 1
PA Det B 0 pass valid 0xd7dc8932 1 / 1
PA VVA A 0 pass valid 0xda5d5f94 1 / 1
7-60 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Example of calibration data format (for antenna 0)
Entering the disp_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id> <device_id2> [<device_id3>]

command, for example disp_cal_data 63 dri 0 0 0 will give a result similar to the example
below:
Where: is:
63 site
dri dri device
0 first dev_id
0 second dev_id
0 third dev_id
The example below shows the data from a calibration when Only antenna 0 was
calibrated (It is recommended that all antennas are calibrated, but it is permissible to
calibrate only the antennas to be used).
In the following example: antenna number 1 represents antenna 0A, antenna number
2 represents antenna 1A, antenna number 3 represents antenna 2A, antenna number
4 represents antenna 0B, antenna number 5 represents antenna 1B, antenna number
6 represents antenna 2B.
68P02902W96-E 7-61
Aug 2007
System response:
DRI ID: 0 0 0
---------------------------------------------
a4b, e80, e80, a7b, e80, e80
a3e, e80, e80, aff, e80, e80
a5d, e80, e80, b45, e80, e80
a8e, e80, e80, b5e, e80, e80
aca, e80, e80, b4b, e80, e80
ae8, e80, e80, b64, e80, e80
af3, e80, e80, b61, e80, e80
af2, e80, e80, b8b, e80, e80
ae3, e80, e80, b65, e80, e80
ac0, e80, e80, b65, e80, e80
a97, e80, e80, b46, e80, e80
a70, e80, e80, ae7, e80, e80
a2d, e80, e80, a6b, e80, e80
9f6, e80, e80, a28, e80, e80
9b7, e80, e80, 95e, e80, e80
954, e80, e80, 91d, e80, e80
943, e80, e80, 909, e80, e80
921, e80, e80, 8e3, e80, e80
911, e80, e80, 8d5, e80, e80
8ef, e80, e80, 8b7, e80, e80
8d0, e80, e80, 8a1, e80, e80
899, e80, e80, 855, e80, e80
7-62 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a SURF2 module
Replacing a SURF2 module

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Preconditions for SURF2 replacement
The Horizon II macro cabinet may contain one or two 900 MHz or 1800 MHz SURF2 modules.
Mixing different frequency SURF2s in the same cabinet is not permitted unless the dual band
adapter is installed. If only one SURF2 is installed, it must be located in the slot nearest the
Tx blocks.
Replacement of a SURF2 can only take place after the cabinet has been taken out of service, in
agreement with the OMC-R.
An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling SURF2 modules. An ESP earthing
connection point is provided on the top left at the front of the cabinet (see Figure 7-1
for location).
68P02902W96-E 7-63
Aug 2007
Replacing a SURF2 module Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
View of the SURF2
Figure 7-11 shows the connectors on the SURF2 module.
Figure 7-11 SURF2 showing connector details
Letters in brackets in Figure 7-11 refer to the port numbering on the second
(optional) SURF2.
7-64 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a SURF2 module
Replacing a SURF2
Removing a faulty SURF2
Follow Procedure 7-24 to remove the SURF2.
Procedure 7-24 Removing a SURF2
1 Make a note of the RF cable connections to the SURF2 module to enable

correct re-connection to the replacement module.
Before disconnecting RF cables, ensure that RF power is OFF. If

RF power is ON when cables are disconnected, severe burns may
result.
2 Disable the CTU2 transmit RF power by using the following
command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the HIISC.
lock_device
or
shutdown_device

(68P02901W23) for information on usage and specific device
codes.
3 When all CTU2s have been shutdown, check that all Tx STATUS LEDs
(yellow) are unlit.
4 Press and release the CTU2 circuit breaker buttons on the CBC to the out
(off) position. Ensure each RADIO STATUS LED is unlit.
5 Press and release the appropriate SURF2 circuit breaker button on the
CBC to the out (off) position.
6 Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing and pulling them
out of the module sockets.
7 Using a Torx driver, unscrew the two M4 captive screws holding the SURF2
module to the top of the cabinet.
8 Using the handles, lift the SURF2 module out of the slot.
68P02902W96-E 7-65
Aug 2007
Replacing a SURF2 module Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Fitting a replacement SURF2 module
Follow Procedure 7-25 to fit a replacement SURF2.
Procedure 7-25 Fitting a replacement SURF2
1 Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement

module to the faulty module.
2 Lower the replacement SURF2 module into the slot. Take care to avoid
trapping cables as the module is seated.
3 Tighten the two captive M4 screws to the correct torque (Refer to Table 7-1
at the start of this chapter).
4 Reconnect the coaxial RF cables to the positions noted in the removal
procedure. Tighten to the correct torque.
5 Switch on the SURF2 circuit breaker button on the CBC.
6 Reset the CTU2 circuit breaker buttons on the CBC. Each RADIO STATUS
LED will flash green for about two minutes, and then remain lit.
Rx bay level calibration must be performed on all branches that

were being serviced by the replaced SURF2.
7 Enable the CTU2 transmit RF power by using the following command at the
OMC-R or from a PC connected to the HIISC.
unlock_device
or
ins_device
The appropriate Tx STATUS LED (yellow) will be lit if the

CTU2 is transmitting.
8 Carry out Rx bay level calibration procedure on page 7-50, as described in
the relevant section of this manual. Record the data.
9 Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance
activity.
The SURF2 module replacement is now complete.
7-66 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing the optional SURF2 dual band adapter
Replacing the optional SURF2 dual band adapter

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to dual band adapter replacement
The replacement procedure described here assumes that an optional dual band adapter is
already installed in the cabinet.
View of the dual band adapter
Figure 7-12 shows the SURF2 dual band adapter.
Figure 7-12 SURF2 dual band adapter
68P02902W96-E 7-67
Aug 2007
Replacing the optional SURF2 dual band adapter Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Dual band adapter replacement procedure
Follow Procedure 7-26 to replace the dual band adapter.
Procedure 7-26 Replacing the dual band adapter
1 Remove the SURF2s from the adapter frame, using the removal procedure
described in Replacing a SURF2 module on page 7-63, but noting which
frequency SURF2 is in which slot.
2 Undo the M4 mounting screw on either end of the adapter frame using a
T20 Torx driver.
3 Lift the adapter frame out of the top panel.
4 Carefully lower the new adapter frame into the top panel and ensure that it
is correctly seated in the top panel.
5 Secure the frame in position by tightening the two M4 mounting screws to
the correct torque (See Torque values on page 7-3).
6 Refit the SURF2s into their correct slots in the adapter frame, using the
replacement procedure described in Replacing a SURF2 module on page
7-63.
7 Rx bay level calibration procedure must be performed on all antennas.
The dual band adapter replacement procedure is now complete.
7-68 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Replacing a Tx block, HCU/DHU or plate
Replacing a Tx block, HCU/DHU or plate

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to Tx block replacement
Ensure that RF power is OFF, before disconnecting RF cables. Severe burns may result
if RF power is ON when RF cables are disconnected.
An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling Tx blocks. An ESP earthing
connection point is provided on the top left at the front of the cabinet (refer to
Figure 7-1).
There are six slots for Tx blocks in the top panel basket of a cabinet, above the CTU2s. There
are three types of Tx block: DUP, HCU and DHU.
Replacing a Tx block requires removal of RF transmitter power for the CTU2(s) that connect
with the faulty Tx block. It is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of
low traffic. Notify the OMC-R of imminent repair activity.
It is important to ensure that all Tx block/plate screw locations have a screw in place which is
tightened to the correct torque (Refer to Table 7-1 at the start of this chapter). This is to ensure
the maximum quality of EMC and general containment.
68P02902W96-E 7-69
Aug 2007
Replacing a Tx block, HCU/DHU or plate Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
View of the duplexer Tx block
Figure 7-13 shows a duplexer Tx block used in the Horizon II macro cabinet.
Figure 7-13 View of the duplexer Tx block
7-70 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Replacing a Tx block
Removing a faulty Tx block
Follow Procedure 7-27 to remove a Tx block.
Procedure 7-27 Removing a Tx block
1 Locate the faulty Tx block, and notice the RF cable connections

to enable correct re-connection to the replacement module.
Identify the CTU2s that make Tx connections to the underside of the faulty Tx
block (See Table 7-7).
Ensure that all CTU2s associated with the faulty Tx block are identied
(for example inputs to an HCU).
2 Disable each CTU2 transmit RF power by using the following
command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the HIISC.
shutdown_device

(68P02901W23) for information on usage and specific device codes.
3 When each CTU2 has been shutdown, check that the Tx status LEDs (yellow)
are unlit.
4 Press and release each CTU2 circuit breaker button on the CBC to the out (off)
position. Ensure each RADIO STATUS LED is unlit.
Ensure that RF power is OFF, before disconnecting RF cables. Severe

burns may result if RF power is ON when RF cables are disconnected.
5 Disconnect all coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing and pulling them out
of the Tx block sockets. Note the positions for correct replacement.
6 Disconnect the CTU2 Tx out SMA connector, using a 6 mm spanner, and
straighten the bend in the cable.
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-71
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-27 Removing a Tx block (Continued)

7 Using a Torx driver, unscrew and retain the two M4 Torx screws holding the Tx
block to the top of the cabinet.
Tx blocks can weigh as much as 5 kg. Handle with care.

8 Lift the Tx block from the basket using its lifting handles.
Tx block connectors
Table 7-7 shows the different types of Tx block connector.
Table 7-7 Connectors for each type of Tx block
Tx block Input connector Output connector

DUP 1 X SMA 1 X 7/16 Tx/Rx to antenna
1 X N-type to SURF2
HCU 2 X SMA 1 X QMA
DHU 3 X SMA 1 X QMA
Feedthrough plate 1 X SMA 1 X N-type to another cabinet
Fitting a replacement Tx block
Follow Procedure 7-28 to fit a replacement Tx block.
Procedure 7-28 Fitting a Tx block
1 Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement Tx

block to the faulty Tx block.
2 Transfer the CTU2 Tx cable from the faulty Tx block to the replacement unit.
Tighten the SMA connector to 1 Nm torque, using a 6 mm torque spanner.
Continued
7-72 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-28 Fitting a Tx block (Continued)

3
To prevent damage to the CTU2 Tx cable, care mast be taken that

it does not catch on internal equipment or structure.
Carefully insert the replacement Tx block into its basket location on the top
panel, adjusting alignment for the retaining screws. Take care to avoid
trapping cables as the Tx block is seated.
4 Fit the two M4 Torx screws that secure the Tx block to the top of the cabinet.
Tighten to the correct torque (Refer to Torque values on page 7-3).
5 Reconnect the coaxial RF cables to the positions noted in the removal
procedure. Tighten to the correct torque.
Ensure all unused SMA inputs to the Tx blocks are fitted with 50
ohm load terminations.
6 Reconnect the CTU2 Tx out SMA connectors, using a 6 mm torque spanner.
Tighten to 1 Nm torque.
7 Switch on the appropriate CTU2 circuit breaker buttons on the CBC. Each
RADIO STATUS LED will flash green for about two minutes, and then remain
lit.
8 Enable the CTU2 transmit RF power by using the following command at the
OMC-R or from a PC connected to the HIISC.
ins_device
The appropriate Tx STATUS LED (yellow) will be lit if the

CTU2 is transmitting.
calibration procedures in this manual. Record the data.
Tx and Rx calibration must be performed on all antennas that

were connected through the replaced device.
activity.
68P02902W96-E 7-73
Aug 2007
Blanking plate, feedthrough plate or HCU/DHU replacement
The replacement procedure for plates or a HCU/DHU is similar to that described for Tx blocks,
but the plates are held by three M4 screws in the base of the Tx block basket. The two M4 Tx
block screw locations are not used for plate attachment.
Unused Tx block locations must be covered with a blanking plate, with all screws
tted and tightened to the correct torque (See Torque values on page 7-3) to ensure
the correct airow and EMC shielding.
7-74 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Digital module replacement
Digital module replacement

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to digital module replacement
A faulty master HIISC, XMUX or site expansion board will cause a redundant module (if fitted)
to take over until the faulty module is replaced. These modules can be hot swapped without
harm to the module or affect on normal operation, provided the equivalent redundant module
has taken over. Removal of a faulty digital module that has not had its function taken over by
a redundant module, and is still partially functional, will affect service. Inform the OMC-R
before replacing such modules.
68P02902W96-E 7-75
Aug 2007
Digital module replacement Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Diagram of digital modules
Figure 7-14 shows the location of the digital modules in the cabinet.
Figure 7-14 Digital module locations in the Horizon II macro cabinet
Site I/O boards are only required when expansion cabinets are used.
7-76 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Replacing digital modules
HIISC removal during ash memory programming may result in boot code corruption.
This is only repairable by returning the HIISC to Motorola. For this reason, the HIISC
should not be removed while the code load is taking place, indicated by ashing red
and green front panel LEDs.
Removing a faulty digital module
Follow Procedure 7-29 to remove a digital module.
An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital modules. An ESP
earthing connection point is provided on the top left at the front of the cabinet (refer
to Figure 7-1).
Procedure 7-29 Removing a faulty digital module
1 If the faulty digital module is still partially functional, due to no redundancy

option, inform the OMC-R before proceeding.
2 Locate the faulty module, as shown in Figure 7-14.
3 Remember the location of any fiber optic cable connections to the module,
(site expansion boards only), to enable correct re-connection to the
replacement module.
There is a possibility of laser radiation when ber optic cables are

disconnected. Do not look directly into cables with or without the
use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data
in/out connectors or unterminated ber optic cables connected to
data in/out connectors.
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-77
Aug 2007
Digital module replacement Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Procedure 7-29 Removing a faulty digital module (Continued)

4 Remove strain relief clips and disconnect each fiber optic cable by gently
pushing the knurled connector in and rotating it through a quarter-turn
anti-clockwise to disengage, then withdraw the cable carefully.
It is advisable to protect the tips of the fiber optic cables with a

protective cover and secure the cables to one side.
5 For the HIISC/XMUX or alarm module, unseat the module by gripping the
upper and lower pair of ejectors between the thumb and first finger of each
hand, then gently squeeze and pull on the ejectors until the module unclips
at the top and bottom of the front panel and unplugs from the rear connector.
Carefully slide the module from its location and place it in an

anti-static storage container.
6 For the site expansion board, undo the single M4 attachment screw and
carefully lift the board out of its slot using the handles provided and place it
in an anti-static storage container.
Fitting a replacement digital module
Follow Procedure 7-30 to install a replacement digital module.
Procedure 7-30 Fitting a replacement digital module
1 Remove the replacement module from the anti-static storage container.

2 For the HIISC/XMUX or alarm module, slide the module into the guide
rails and push firmly into place. The ejectors will audibly click into place
as confirmation of correct insertion.
3 For the site expansion board, lower the board into its slot using the handles
provided. Ensure the backplane interface connector on the base is firmly
seated in position and then tighten the M4 attachment screw to the correct
torque using a Torx driver (See Torque values on page 7-3).
4 Connect any fiber optic cables by inserting the connector and rotating a
quarter-turn clockwise to engage. Fit strain relief clips around the fiber
optic cables and secure to one of the site expansion board handles (slots are
provided in the handles for this purpose).
Ensure fiber optic cables are correctly connected to the locations

noted during site expansion board removal.
Continued
7-78 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-30 Fitting a replacement digital module (Continued)

5 Ensure the appropriate LEDs indicate correct operation.
• When the red and green ALARM and STATUS LEDs on the front
panel the HIISC are ashing, the boot code is downloading
into non-volatile memory for software upgrade. Do not
remove power or reset the cabinet until downloading has been
completed, as this will corrupt the non-volatile memory.
• If the boot code is corrupted, contact Motorola Customer
Network Resolution Centre requesting the boot code
restoration procedure and the appropriate boot code le.
6 When fitting a redundant HIISC, refer to Testing HIISC redundancy on page
7-80 for details of further checks required.
7 Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.
68P02902W96-E 7-79
Aug 2007
Testing HIISC redundancy Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Testing HIISC redundancy

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Test procedure
Procedure 7-31 tests HIISC redundancy (if used) by forcing the master and redundant HIISCs to
swap roles. The commands refer to the base transceiver processors (BTPs) within each HIISC.
Forcing a switch to the redundant HIISC by using the command will cause a site reset.
swap_devices
Procedure 7-31 Testing HIISC redundancy
1 Connect a PC to the TTY MMI port on the master HIISC.

2 At the
CUST MMI>
prompt, type:
state <site_id> btp * *
Where <site_id> is the site number.
The status of both BTPs will be displayed as follows:
BTP 0 0 0 B-U NO REASON

BTP 1 0 0 E-U NO REASON
Where B-U is busy unlocked (master) and E-U is enabled unlocked

(redundant).
Continued
7-80 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Testing HIISC redundancy
Procedure 7-31 Testing HIISC redundancy (Continued)

3 At the
CUST MMI>
prompt, type:
swap_devices <site #> btp
Where <site #> is the site number.
This command will swap HIISC roles by forcing the redundant HIISC into a
busy state and making it the master, and forcing the master HIISC into an
enabled state and making it redundant.
4 At the
CUST MMI>
prompt, confirm the swap by typing:

The status of both BTPs will now show changed roles:

5 Make test calls on the site to verify the new master HIISC.
6 At the
CUST MMI>
prompt type, swap the HIISCs back to their original states by typing:
swap_devices <site_id> btp 1 0 0 btp 0 0 0
Where <site_id> is the site number, btp 1 0 0 is the master HIISC

and btp 0 0 0 is the redundant HIISC.
7 At the
CUST MMI>
prompt, confirm the swap by typing:

Both BTPs have now reverted to their original roles:

8 Make test calls on the site to verify the new master HIISC.
68P02902W96-E 7-81
Aug 2007
Calibrating the HIISC (GCLK) Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
Calibrating the HIISC (GCLK)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to HIISC (GCLK) calibration
GCLK calibration can be carried out automatically using the CINDY commissioning
tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation for details.
This procedure explains how to calibrate the Ovenized Crystal Oscillator (OCXO) in the HIISC
GCLK in the Horizon II macro product at a BSS site.
When to calibrate the GCLK
The calibration procedure is to be used on the following occasions:

• When more than one frame slip per hour is observed at the OMC-R (typically more than
34/day).
• Whenever calibration is required. (Display the active alarms for a site - if calibration is
required, there will be an alarm stating this).
This procedure should only be carried out by fully trained, GSM qualied personnel.
Under NO circumstances should this procedure be undertaken, unless all the correct
test equipment is readily available.
• The command gclk_cal_mode used in this procedure should only be executed at

the BTS where the calibration is being carried out.
• No call processing can occur involving the HIISC during calibration mode.
• Allow a period of 15 minutes to elapse after switching the OCXO power on, to
give sufficient time for the unit to reach operating temperature and achieve
frequency stabilization.
7-82 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Calibrating the HIISC (GCLK)
The test equipment required to carry out the GCLK calibration is as follows:
• A 9-way to 9-way TTY cable.
• A caesium or rubidium clock standard with 1 or 10 MHz output frequency.
• A universal counter with external reference, for example, the Hewlett Packard model
HP5385A or equivalent.
• A BNC to 3-way HIISC test lead, part number 3086144E01.
Preparation for GCLK calibration
Follow Procedure 7-32 to prepare the HIISC (GCLK) for calibration.
Procedure 7-32 Preparing for GCLK calibration
1 Connect the serial A port of the PC to the HIISC TTY MMI port using the 9-way
to 9-way TTY cable (See Figure 7-15).
2 Start the terminal emulator program.
3 Connect the output from the 10 MHz standard to the reference input of the
frequency counter, select external standard.
4 Set the frequency gate time to 10 seconds and the display to 10 significant digits.
5 Connect the test cable extracting the 8 kHz output signal from the CAL port on
the front of the HIISC to the input of the frequency counter. Pin 3 - Earth (top
pin). Pin 1 - 8 kHz signal (bottom pin).
68P02902W96-E 7-83
Aug 2007
Figure 7-15 Horizon II macro GCLK calibration cable connections
7-84 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
GCLK calibration procedure
Follow Procedure 7-33 to calibrate the HIISC (GCLK).
Procedure 7-33 Calibrating the HIISC (GCLK)
1 To start the GCLK calibration mode, enter the command:

gclk_cal_mode
The command is used to tell the sync function and HIISC software that a calibration
is to be performed.
gclk_cal_mode
The gclk_cal_mode command is used to tell the sync function and HIISC
software that a calibration is to be performed and can only be executed
at Horizon II macro sites outside sysgen mode. The command is NOT
allowed on a master HIISC when a standby HIISC is available.
When the command is executed the system will prompt for verification:
Site <Local site number> starting GCLK CALIBRATION MODE.

If this is a single MCU site, the site will be down until
Calibration is complete.
Are you sure (y=yes, n=no)?
Enter:y. The HIISC will begin calibration mode. The command is aborted if the
reply is anything other than y.
2 After a short delay (about 30 seconds) the following prompt will appear:
Frequency Counter Connected, Enter y when ready,

or a to abort test.
Enter:y. The command is aborted and calibration mode exited if the reply is
anything other than y
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-85
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-33 Calibrating the HIISC (GCLK) (Continued)

3 Adjust the OCXO control voltage using the +/- and 0 to 3 keys until the measured
frequency is exactly 8000,000000 Hz. The values entered here, change the
frequency by varying degrees. For example:
• +0 will increase the output by a small amount.
• +1 will increase the frequency by approximately 10 times.

These are not exact values as every OCXO has a different gain.
This method gives sufficient control to correct the frequency within
a short time. A typical sequence of numbers may look as follows:
Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, -(0..3) to dec >-3

(7.99999898)
Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, -(0..3) to dec >+3
(8.00000020)
(8.00000019 - 8.00000020)
(8.00000004)
(8.00000020)
(8.00000018)
(8.00000002 -8.00000003)
(8.000000--)
(8.000000-)
(8.00000000)
Continued
7-86 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007

4 A prompt will appear for saving the results:
Enter a to abort, s to save, +(0..3) to inc, -(0..3) to dec >
Enter s
CAL OFFSET is 23654 DAC bits.
After calibration, the HIISC applies a set of voltages to the DAC that feeds the
OCXO, requiring the user to input the corresponding output frequency. This is
necessary because the OCXO frequency/voltage characteristic is not linear and the
HIISC adjusts for this by taking readings across a range of DAC voltages.
5 To calibrate the OCXO, gain, enter the measured frequency value from the counter
after the value has settled in response to the
MMI
prompts.
When taking frequency measurements, ensure that a full gate period

elapses from the time the new value is set to reading the counter. This
wait may be several seconds, depending on the counter.
A typical sequence of frequency measurements may be presented as follows:
Dac set to 1.0 volts, Enter Freq Value or a to abort > 7999.99853
Calibration Gain 3.865560e-01
SYNC>
6
The HIISC is reset when the calibration is complete.
Continued
68P02902W96-E 7-87
Aug 2007

7 On completion, the HIISC automatically rejects the calibration if it is outside the
threshold and the following message is displayed:
Computed Gain > Max WILL RETRY GAIN
In this case, calibration must be performed again. If calibration fails the second time
with the same or similar value, the OCXO may be operating outside the Motorola
specification, in which case the HIISC is deemed faulty and should be replaced.
7-88 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Line interface unit board replacement
Line interface unit board replacement

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section gives instructions for removing and replacing a Balanced-line Interconnect Board
(BIB/BIM) or a T43 Coaxial Interconnect board (T43/CIM). Since the procedure for both boards
is the same, this section refers to either board as a line interface unit board.
All channel trafc associated with a line interface unit board is lost during the
replacement procedure. If only one 2.048 Mbit/s link is affected by a line interface unit
board fault, replacement of the line interface unit board must be performed during
a period of low trafc so as not to interrupt service on the other 2.048 Mbit/s links
connected to the line interface unit board.
Replacement of a Line interface unit can take place only after the equipment has been taken
out of service, in agreement with the OMC-R.
The line interface unit is mounted on the interface panel in Horizon II macro and on the back
panel in Horizon II mini.
In Horizon II micro, the line interface unit is mounted on the side wall of the cable entry box,
this requires that the equipment ac power supply is isolated before opening the cable entry box.
When electrical power is connected to the enclosure potentially hazardous voltages, in

excess of 240 V ac, are present inside the cable entry box.
The ac power to the enclosure MUST be isolated before the cable entry box covers
are removed.
Figure 7-16 shows a BIB and Figure 7-17 shows a T43 board, with the covers removed for clarity.
68P02902W96-E 7-89
Aug 2007
Line interface unit board replacement Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures
View of BIB
Figure 7-16 BIB
7-90 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
View of T43
Figure 7-17 T43 board
68P02902W96-E 7-91
Aug 2007
Replacing a line interface unit board
Procedure 7-34 Replacing a line interface unit board
1 Enter the lock_device command to take device out of service (OOS) in

agreement with the OMC-R.
2 Select one of the following:
IF: THEN...
Equipment is Horizon II Gain access to the interface panel
macro
Equipment is Horizon II Remove the rear door
mini
Equipment is Horizon II
micro
The ac power to the enclosure

must be isolated before the cable
entry box covers are removed.
Isolate the ac power to the enclosure and

remove the cable entry box covers.
3 Select one of the following:

IF: THEN...
A T43 board
1. Record the order in which the 2.048
Mbit/s links are connected to the T43
board.
2. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links from

the T43 board.
A BIB
1. Undo the two screws that secure the
37-pin D-type connector to the BIB.
2. Disconnect the 37-pin D-type external

link connector from the BIB.
4 Remove, and retain, the four screws that secure the line interface unit
board cover to the line interface unit board. Remove and retain the cover.
Continued
7-92 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 7-34 Replacing a line interface unit board (Continued)

5 Remove, and retain, the four screws that secure the line interface unit
board to the enclosure. Lift the line interface unit board free to disconnect
the 37-pin D-type connector.
6 Fit the replacement line interface unit board to the 37-pin D-type
connector in the cable entry box.
7 Secure the line interface unit board to the enclosure using the four screws
removed in step 5.
8 Refit the line interface unit board cover and screws retained in step 4.
Hand tighten the screws.
9 Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links or the 37-pin D-type external link
connector to the replacement line interface unit board.
10 Refit any access panels, doors, or the cable box cover, as appropriate,
and return the equipment to service.
11 Enter the unlock_device command to bring the device back in service
(INS).
activity.
68P02902W96-E 7-93
Aug 2007
7-94 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Site verication procedures

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 8-1
Aug 2007
Introduction to Horizon II BTS verication procedures Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Introduction to Horizon II BTS verication procedures

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The procedures described in this section are as follows:

• Checking the antenna VSWR and calibrating the transmit output power.
• Checking the database equipage.
• Checking the backhaul link.
• Checking the PIX connections and alarm test.
• Site restoration.
CINDY commissioning tool
Many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried out automatically using the
CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation for details.
8-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Test equipment, leads and plugs
Test equipment, leads and plugs

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to test equipment, leads and plugs
This section provides information on the test equipment required for the procedures in this
chapter.
Ensure that all test equipment associated with commissioning of Motorola cellular
base stations is within calibration date.
Table 8-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform the hardware verification
procedures provided in this chapter.
Table 8-1 Hardware verication equipment
Quantity Description Comments

1 IBM compatible portable With:
Personal Computer
• PCMCIA Type 2 slot.
• Serial comms port.
• Battery power.
1 Commercial terminal PC PLUS or similar software.
emulator software
1 ESD protection kit –
1 Signal generator Up to 2 GHz.
1 Digital multimeter Hewlett Packard E2378A or equivalent.
1 30 dB attenuator 100 W minimum.
1 RF adapter kit RTLXQ98088 or equivalent.
Continued
68P02902W96-E 8-3
Aug 2007
Test equipment, leads and plugs Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Table 8-1 Hardware verication equipment (Continued)

Quantity Description Comments
2 N to 7/16 inch adapter –
1 N to N barrel adapter –
1
• RF wattmeter with 5 • For measuring average power on the
W, 10 W, 25 W and 50 calibration channel, use a Bird model 43
W elements. wattmeter or equivalent.
• Digital RF wattmeter • For measuring TX power on a BCCH/TCH

with wideband power channel, use a meter capable of measuring
sensor. burst average power.
1 2 metres of N to N male Must be calibrated.
coaxial cable
1 4 metres of N to N male Must be calibrated.
coaxial cable
2 9-way to 9-way cable Compatible with PC to TTY port on CTU2/HIISC.
1 9-way to 9-way cable DSP MMI/RSS cable, connecting PC to CTU2 TTY
(CTU2 only) port.
Test leads required
Test lead calibration
To minimize variations in test results, ensure that all appropriate test leads used in hardware
verification procedures are calibrated.
• A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipment and associated test
leads annually.
• Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads in the eld.
8-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
9-way to 9-way CTU2/HIISC cable
Figure 8-1 Horizon II macro 9-way to 9-way hardware verication cable connections
68P02902W96-E 8-5
Aug 2007
Test equipment, leads and plugs Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
9-way to 9-way CTU2 cable
Figure 8-2 Horizon II macro 9-way to 9-way CTU2 cable connections
TCU-B test lead 3086240N01 may alternatively be used instead of CTU2 test lead
3086299N01, but adapter 58C86540N01 is required to attach the 25-way cable
connector to the 9-way CTU2 port.
8-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Connections for a PIX test lead
Table 8-2 shows pinout details to make a PIX test lead.

Table 8-2 Test plug pin connections
From Pin To Pin

1 20
2 21
3 22
4 23
5 24
6 25
7 26
8 27
9, 10, 11 28 and 29
not used not used
• When making the PIX test lead, perform the following:

Normally open (N/O) PIX inputs should be connected through a 50 ohm
resistor.
Normally closed (N/C) PIX inputs should be connected through a 50 Kohm
resistor.
Details of N/O and N/C site inputs can be found in the equip_eas file in
the site commissioning database.
68P02902W96-E 8-7
Aug 2007
CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The objective of the VSWR check is to ensure that antenna feeders and connectors are properly
terminated. The power calibration procedure ensures that the pre-defined maximum transmitter
power output is correctly set at the RF connector of the equipment.
When a transceiver is manufactured, it undergoes comprehensive transmit-and-receive

calibration procedures. These procedures aim to produce a transceiver that exhibits a flat
frequency response over the GSM band. When a transmitter is used, the calibration is
performed by distributing the channels over three detector groups (the detector being the
device that maintains a steady output power level).
In the field, the procedure for setting the transmit output power involves using a set of
commands called Cell Site Power (CSPWR). The CSPWR, through its functionality of trimming
the BTS output power, can be used to account for any abnormalities that occur between the
CTU2 and the RF. The offset is reduced from the requested power level, so that a steady output
is maintained at the RF connector of the BTS for all the channels.
Complete the procedures, Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check on page
8-11 before beginning the VSWR and cell site power calibration procedures.
VSWR checks on Horizon II micro
(potentially up to: 60 W for PGSM900, 63 W for EGSM900 and 50 W for DCS1800,
in single density high power mode), prior to delivery. Personnel carrying out BTS
calibration must be prepared to calibrate for macro BTS levels.
Refer to the following standards (USA and EC), or equivalent national and regional
regulations, when making calculations for RF equipment:
• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
• CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High
Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).
With the Horizon II micro BTS the max_tx_bts parameter value MUST be set between 5
and 21 or the transmit power will exceed the value that is specied for this equipment.
For a standard power option, setting the max_tx_bts to less than 5 can result in:
• Transmit output power above recommended levels.

• Increased fan noise.
• The possibility of power cutback or shutdown due to increased enclosure
temperature.
8-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information
Table 8-3 Tx output power during tests
Mode 900 MHz 1800 MHz

Single density 40 W (46 dBm) 32 W (45 dBm)
Double density 20 W (43 dBm) 16 W (42 dBm)
The following test equipment is required during the VSWR and output power calibration
procedure:
• A digital power meter which can measure the burst average power, with 5 W and 50 W
elements.
• A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the chapter on Site
verification procedures).
• A 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the chapter
on Site verification procedures).
• A 7/16 N-type adaptor.
• A 50 ohm, 100 W power attenuator.
All test equipment and test leads must be calibrated annually by a recognized
laboratory. Test equipment and test leads must not be calibrated in the eld.
Do not optimize Motorola cellular base stations with test equipment that is beyond
its calibration due date.
Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes before use.
Commands used
Table 8-4 lists the commands for the VSWR and output power calibration procedure.
The symbol 0 used in the commands is a zero.
68P02902W96-E 8-9
Aug 2007
Table 8-4 VSWR and power calibration commands.
BSS MMI Command Function

ins_device Initializes the device, bringing it into service.
lock_device Prevents the device from being used.
clear_cal_data Clears previously stored calibration data for a
specified transceiver on a per DRI basis.
cal_test_mode on Enters the calibration test mode.
fm test_mode on Puts the DSP fault management module in test mode.
fm_test block none none 0xff Blocks all the DSP fault management alarms.
cal_config tx_cab_mode <single> Sets Tx power calibration mode for single density.
OR single is the default mode and can be omitted.
cal_config tx_cab_mode
<double> Sets Tx power calibration mode for double density.
cal_config tx_cab_carriers Sets Tx power calibration to calibrate the first
<carriera> carrier only when in double density mode.
OR carriera is the default carrier and can be omitted.
cal_config tx_cab_carriers <both> Sets Tx power calibration to calibrate both
carriers when in double density mode.
This feature is available only with 1670.27, 1740.22,
1760.0C or later software release.
cal_cabinet tx_cab Performs Tx power calibration.
ts a txp 0x00 Turns all timeslots to max power for the current
carrier.
ts a txp 0xff Turns off power to all timeslots for the current
carrier.
ts a modulator unmod Turns off modulation.
ts a state call_proc Puts all timeslots into call processing state.
ts a synth lock Locks the synthesizers.
cal_store_1 Stores the calibration data.
cal_config rf_band p900 Overrides for PGSM only Duplexer.
chg_ele max_tx_bts <N> <site_id> Changes the max_tx_bts parameter to set cell site Tx
<CELL_ID> output power. Where N is the desired value.
For Horizon II micro, this value must be

within the range of 5 to 21 (standard
power option) or 0 to 21 (high power
option).
chg_ele max_tx_bts Changes the max_tx_bts parameter to a desired
value.
8-10 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23) for

information on usage of specific commands.
Test stages
There are four stages to the procedure:

• Preparing for test.
• Checking the VSWR.
• Calibrating the transmit output power.
• Restoring the site.
VSWR checks ensure correct antenna matching and can prove the serviceability of the
antenna. Repeat the procedures for all antennas on site, including receive antennas.
Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check
Prepare the RF path for bay level calibration. DRIs in the site must be locked, the CTU2 has to be
reset, a dummy load must be connected if there is no antenna, and all alarms must be disabled.
In the Horizon II macro, a transceiver may consist of one or two DRIs. If a CTU2 is configured
for double density mode (two DRIs), Tx cabinet calibration needs to be performed only on the
first DRI because the internal difference value keeps the power of the second carrier equal
to the first.
The internal difference value is not visible through the MMI command, and the TX
offset reported by disp_cal_data for the second DRI is a copy of the value for the first
DRI. Dual carrier calibration can verify that both carriers transmit at equal power.
Optionally, the Tx power of both DRIs can be calibrated as described in the section, Preparing
to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power.
To determine the configuration of the CTU2 as single or double density transceiver and the
DRI numbers corresponding to each CTU2.
68P02902W96-E 8-11
Aug 2007
At the BSC TTY, change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt type the following: disp_eq
<site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
Where: is:
<site_id> the number of the site logged into.
<cell_id> the antenna/relative cell number (0 to 5).

<DRI_number> DRI number of the transceiver.
Output for a single density CTU2:

DRI identifier: 0 0
Output for a double density CTU2:

DRI identifier: 0 1
In this case we see that DRI 0 1 is a double density CTU2 and is associated with DRI 0 2.
8-12 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Repeating the command for DRI 0 2 yields the following:

DRI identifier: 0 2
Thus, in this example, DRI 0 1 and DRI 0 2 are on the same CTU2.
Calibrate the single density CTU2 once on the DRI.
For the double density CTU2, calibration is performed on only one of the two DRIs, but the other
DRI must be locked for the procedures to be carried out. Furthermore, the clear_cal_data
commands must be issued for both DRIs.
For 4 Branch Rx Diversity the output looks similar to the following:

DRI identifier: 0 0
The diversity flag for this DRI is [diversity_flag]: 2
The fm cell type is [fm_cell_type]: 4
68P02902W96-E 8-13
Aug 2007
Output format for disp_cal_data command
The CTU2 stores calibration data in a higher precision format (UWORDs) than the CTU
(UBYTEs). Since the two transceivers are interchangeable, the data is stored in the database in
a common format and the higher precision UWORD format is now used.
This does not affect the output format of the disp_cal_data command when the transceiver
is unlocked (UWORDs for the CTU2 and UBYTEs for other transceivers). However, if the
transceiver is locked, the data on it cannot be accessed nor can the transceiver type be
determined and therefore the data can only be displayed in the format in which it is stored
on the database (that is, UWORD format).
Use one of the following formulae to convert the appropriate disp_cal_data output to a gain
value (FEG):
• For the CTU2: FEG = 2's_complement_16_bit_value / 256
• For other transceivers: FEG = 17.5 + (2's_complement_8_bit_value / 10)
Use one of the following formulae to convert the gain value (FEG) to the UWORD or UBYTE
format:
• UWORD: 2's_complement_16_bit_value = round(FEG x 256)
• UBYTE: 2's_complement_8_bit_value = round{(FEG - 17.5) x 10}
8-14 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration
Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR)

calibration
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CTU2 cell site power calibration and VSWR checks can be carried out automatically
using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation
for details.
Two methods available for normal VSWR checking are described in this section; one automatic
and one manual. The reason for the two methods is as follows:
VSWR method 1 (automatic) When typing the cal_cabinet tx_cab command at the DSP
MMI prompt, it effectively executes a small script containing the following commands:
TS A CHAN 23 Set all timeslots to channel 23 (900 MHz).

TS A CHAN 53 Set all timeslots to channel 53 (900 MHz PGSM).
TS A TXP 00
TS A MODULATOR UNMOD
TS A STATE CALL_PROC
TS A SYNTH LOCK
Before executing the cal_cabinet tx_cab command, it assumes that the synthesizers are in
normal mode (not locked), as is the case after the unit is powered up for the first time.
VSWR method 2 (manual) To set a specific channel, instead of defaulting to channel 23,
53 or 668, additional commands must be entered, rather than using the cal_cabinet tx_cab
command. One command sets the appropriate channel and the other switches the CTU2
output power on and off.
Automatic VSWR test procedure
The first method for normal VSWR checking uses automatic channel selection. The cal_cabinet
tx_cab command automatically selects a midpoint channel number. However, manual channel
selection can be performed following the steps detailed in the manual test procedure.
To automate the validation of the VSWR of the transmission path:

• Perform Procedure 8-1 Automatic VSWR forward power test on page 8-16.
• Perform Procedure 8-2 Automatic VSWR reverse power test on page 8-17.
68P02902W96-E 8-15
Aug 2007
Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Automatic VSWR forward power test
Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure that all personnel are clear of
the antenna. Do not carry out this check unless antenna installation is complete.
Ensure that the antenna is rated to allow full power to avoid damage to equipment.
To reduce the possibility of interference with other users, minimize the time that
the CTU2 is powered up.
Procedure 8-1 Automatic VSWR forward power test
Ensure that RF power is OFF before connecting or disconnecting

antenna cables. Severe burns may result if RF power is present when
cables are connected or disconnected
Disable the CTU2 to ensure that RF is not present, then disconnect the antenna.
Connect a dummy load to the meter, ensuring that the meter is fitted with a 50
W element and connect the meter to the Tx output.
2 Bring the CTU2 into service using the ins_device command.
chglev
pizza (this is a password and appears on screen as *****)
fm test_mode on
cal_cabinet tx_cab
Continued
8-16 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-1 Automatic VSWR forward power test (Continued)

4 Press N to specify that the test should NOT be run in high power mode.
5 Monitor and record the power meter reading (the forward output power).
6 Press Q.
Automatic VSWR reverse power test
Procedure 8-2 Automatic VSWR reverse power test

cables are connected or disconnected.
Replace the 50 W element in the wattmeter with a 5 W element and reverse the
direction on the power meter.
2 Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to the antenna.
3 At the DSP MMI TEST prompt type:
cal_cabinet tx_cab
4 Press N to specify that the test should NOT be run in high power mode.
5 Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the power meter.
Readings should show reflected (reverse) power of no more than 5%

of the forward power at the point of measurement, and less than 1
W. If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings is unacceptable,
suspect an improper termination of the antenna feeder and connector.
6 Press Q.
7 Disable the CTU2 then remove the power meter and reconnect the antenna.
This procedure leaves the transceiver in an overridden state. It must

be reset before it can be used.
8 Use the Site restoration procedure given later in this chapter to return the
site to service.
68P02902W96-E 8-17
Aug 2007
Manual VSWR test procedure
The second method for normal VSWR checking allows the manual selection of a channel.
To mechanically validate the VSWR of the transmission path through to the antenna:
• Perform Procedure 8-3Manual VSWR forward power test on page 8-18.
• Perform Procedure 8-4Manual VSWR reverse power test on page 8-20.
Manual VSWR forward power test
Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure that all personnel are clear of
the antenna. Do not carry out this check unless antenna installation is complete.
Ensure that the antenna is rated to allow full power to avoid any damage to equipment.
To reduce the possibility of interference with other users, minimize the time that
the CTU2 is powered up.
Procedure 8-3 Manual VSWR forward power test

Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the power meter, ensuring
that the meter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Tx
output.
2 Bring the CTU2 into service using the ins_device command.
Continued
8-18 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-3 Manual VSWR forward power test (Continued)

• chglev
• pizza this is a password and appears on screen as *****
• fm test_mode on
• fm_test block none none 0xff
• ts a state call_proc
4 Enter the following command: ts a chan nnn
where: a is all time slots (TS) and nnn is the specified channel number.
5 To switch the power on, enter the following command: ts a txp 0x00
Where: a is all time slots (TS) and 00 is maximum output power.
6 Monitor and record the power meter reading (the forward output power).
7 To switch the power off, enter the following command: ts a txp 0xff
Where: a is all time slots (TS) and ff is zero output power.
68P02902W96-E 8-19
Aug 2007
Manual VSWR reverse power test
Procedure 8-4 Manual VSWR reverse power test

Replace the 50 W element in the power meter with a 5 W element and reverse
the direction on the power meter.
2 Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to the antenna.
3 To switch the power on, enter: ts a txp 0x00
Where: a is all time slots (TS) and 00 is maximum output
power.
4 Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the power meter.
Readings should show reflected (reverse) power of no more than 5%

of the forward power at the point of measurement, and less than 1
W. If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings is unacceptable,
suspect an improper termination of the antenna feeder and connector.
5 To switch the power off, enter: ts a txp 0xff
Where: a is all time slots (TS) and ff is zero output
power.
6 Repeat the above forward and reverse power checks for the required number
of channels.
7 When all channels have been checked, at the DSP MMI TEST prompt type:
ts a state active_standby.
8 Remove the power meter and reconnect the antenna.

9 Use the Site restoration procedure given in later in this chapter to return the
site to service.
8-20 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Tx output power calibration procedure
To calibrate CTU2 transmit output power carry out the following procedures:
• If required, perform Procedure 8-5Changing the max_tx_bts on page 8-22.
The CTU2 transmit power, in Horizon II micro, is factory calibrated as a macro

BTS (potentially up to: 60 W for PGSM900, 63 W for EGSM900 and 50 W for
DCS1800, in single density high power mode), prior to delivery.
Personnel carrying out BTS calibration must be prepared to calibrate for macro
BTS levels.
Refer to the following standards (USA and EC), or equivalent national and
regional regulations, when making calculations for RF equipment:
• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to
Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300
GHz.
• CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High
Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).
With the Horizon II micro BTS standard power option the max_tx_bts parameter
value MUST be set between 5 and 21 or the transmit power will exceed that
specied for this equipment.
Setting the max_tx_bts on a standard power unit to less than 5 may result in:
• Transmit output power above recommended levels.

• Increased fan noise.
• The possibility of power cutback or shutdown due to increased enclosure
temperature.
A high power option unit may have the max_tx_bts parameter set between 0 and 21.
• Perform Procedure 8-6Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power on page 8-22.
• Perform Procedure 8-7Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power on page 8-25.
• Perform Procedure 8-8Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion on page 8-26.
68P02902W96-E 8-21
Aug 2007
If the DRI does not become B-U because of the error, Tx Power Unachievable, then
the max_tx_bts of the cell needs to be temporarily modified to a lower power so that
the radio can come into service. At this point, calibration can be performed as normal.
Once the radio is calibrated in its desired configuration (single or double density,
Horizon or Horizon II equipment), the max_tx_bts can be returned to its desired value.
Procedure 8-5 Changing the max_tx_bts
Execute the following command from the OMC, BSC or by remote login from
the PC:
chg_ele max_tx_bts <N> <site_id> cell_number=<CELL_ID>
Where: <N> is: the max_tx_bts value (the valid

range for Horizon II micro is 5
to 21, standard power option
or 0 to 21, high power option)
<site_id> is the site number
<CELL_ID> is the cell identifier
Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power
Procedure 8-6 Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power
1 Connect the 9-way to 9-way HIISC cable from the PC serial A port to the HIISC
TTY port.
2 At the PC, start the terminal emulator program.
3 Lock all DRIs in the sector. At the HIISC TTY, change to Level 3 and at the
MMI-RAM> prompt type:
Always lock the transceiver providing the BCCH last as this prevents
the BCCH being switched to alternate transceivers.
Continued
8-22 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-6 Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power (Continued)

4

Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load/attenuator/coupler to the power

meter, ensuring the meter is fitted with a 100 W element. Connect the meter
to the Tx output, ensuring that sufficient attenuation is present to protect the
power meter/sensor from damage.
Ensure that the digital power wattmeter has been correctly set up.
Refer to the manufacturer’s manual for detailed instructions on how
to carry out the following:
• Perform self-calibration of power meter with sensor.

• Enter cable offset (Cable loss) into power meter to display the
correct output power.
• Enable burst averaging or “Burst Average Power”.
5 Ensure that both the carriers A and B are unlocked BEFORE starting the
procedure. Change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt, type:
ins_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
6 Connect a serial port on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the
CTU2 to be calibrated using the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable.
If necessary, switch the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable from providing RSS
connectivity to providing DSP connectivity.
7 At the DSP MMI prompt type: chglev. The password is pizza.
8 Enter calibration test mode and disable alarms by typing the following
commands:
cal_test_mode on
fm test_mode on
Continued
68P02902W96-E 8-23
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-6 Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power (Continued)

9 By default, Tx calibration is performed in the mode specified in the database. To
force Tx calibration in either single or double density mode for a transceiver,
enter one of the following commands as required:
cal_config tx_cab_mode single
cal_config tx_cab_mode double
To reset Tx calibration to the mode specified
in the database, enter the following command:
cal_config tx_cab_mode database
When configuring a double density CTU2, the second carrier needs to

be locked BEFORE calibration if the same calibration figures are to
be used for the operation of both A and B carriers.
10 OPTIONAL STEP TO CALIBRATE CARRIER B. This step is only applicable if
calibrating in double density mode (see step 9). By default, only the first carrier
(Carrier A) is calibrated. To calibrate the second carrier (Carrier B) additionally,
specify that both carriers are to be calibrated with the following command:
cal_config tx_cab_carriers both
This feature is only available with software release 1670.27, 1740.22,

1760.0C or later. Both carriers have approximately the same output
power. Due to variations in the hardware and factory calibration,
small differences can occur. To fine-tune the calibration so that both
carriers can achieve the same power, specify that both carriers should
be calibrated by entering the above command.
To reset Tx calibration to only calibrate Carrier A, enter the following command:

cal_config tx_cab_carriers carriera
11
900 MHz radios take the EGSM RF band from the EID by default. If
PGSM duplexers are fitted, the radio needs to be configured for the
PGSM band.
To set the RF band to PGSM900, enter the following command:

cal_config rf_band p900
The following message is displayed on the screen:
Setting RF band to PGSM900
8-24 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power
Procedure 8-7 Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power
1 Start the Tx calibration procedure by typing the following

command at the DSP MMI prompt: cal_cabinet tx_cab
The following warning message is displayed on the screen:
WARNING! All attenuation is about to be removed.

Please ensure that appropriate attenuation
is attached to the CTU2 TX output.
2 Check the connections to the antenna and then press ENTER.
For calibration in single density mode only, the following information and
instructions is printed:
High Power Mode is currently DISABLED (max_tx_bts is >= 0).

High Power Mode will only be used if max_tx_bts database
parameter is set to -1.
If the current site database is accurate, you should run
TX cabinet calibration in the same mode as the database.
Press H to calibrate in High Power Mode, or press N to calibrate
in Normal Power Mod
The above message does not appear if the transceiver is set to high
power mode.
3
For Horizon II micro, only use N.
Press H or N, as appropriate.
The following instructions is displayed:
Press U to increase power, D to decrease power

until the target output power is reached.
Then press Q when finished.
Continued
68P02902W96-E 8-25
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-7 Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power (Continued)

4 Press U to increase output power or D to decrease output power until the
reading on the power meter matches the target maximum power for the sector.
With the Horizon II micro BTS standard power option the max_tx_bts
parameter value MUST be set between 5 and 21 or the transmit power
will exceed the value that is specied for this equipment. A high power
option BTS may have a max_tx_bts parameter setting of 0 to 21.
As the output power is adjusted, a message similar to the following is displayed:
Setting offset to = 0x13

5 Press Q when the desired output power level has been reached.
6 If Carrier B was configured to be calibrated in the previous procedure, then
follow the on screen directions to repeat step 2 to step 5 for Carrier B.
Otherwise, proceed to next step.
7 Store the new Tx calibration using the
following DSP MMI command: cal_store_1
After a few seconds delay (up to 16 seconds), the result of the data storage is
displayed on the screen in the format:
cal_store_1
PASS
CTU2.carA.ts_0>
8 After the data has been stored, connect the 9-way to 9-way HIISC
cable from the PC serial A port to the HIISC MMI TTY port and enter
the following command to lock the CTU2 that has been calibrated:
lock_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0.
Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion
Procedure 8-8 Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion
1 Move the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable to the CTU2 TTY port of the next
CTU2 to be calibrated and repeat the procedure from Procedure 8-5 on page
8-22 step 4.
2 Disable the CTU2. Remove the power meter and check that all antennas have
been reconnected.
Continued
8-26 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-8 Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion (Continued)

3 Use the Site restoration procedure given later in this chapter to return the
site to service.
Tx enclosure channel numbers and frequencies
The Tx channel numbers and frequencies for the Horizon II equipment are as follows:

TS A CHAN 53 Set all timeslots to channel 53 (900 MHz PGSM).
68P02902W96-E 8-27
Aug 2007
Checking the database equipage Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Checking the database equipage

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The database equipage checks determine what devices and functions have been equipped in
the BSC/Horizon II BTS database.
The following test equipment is required during the procedure:

• A 9-way to 9-way cable.
Commands used
The following commands are used during the procedure:
Command Function
disp_site Displays the site number.
disp_equipment Displays the active equipment at a specified site.
Test procedures for checking the database equipage
There are two stages to the procedure:

• Preparation for database checks on page 8-29.
• Database equipage check procedure on page 8-29.
8-28 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Checking the database equipage
Preparation for database checks
Procedure 8-9 Preparation for database checks
1 Ensure that the site is in call processing mode.

2 Connect the serial A port on the PC to the HIISC TTY port using the 9-way to
9-way cable.
3 Start the terminal emulator program at the PC.
Database equipage check procedure
Procedure 8-10 Database equipage check
1 At the CUST MMI prompt type: disp_site

The following message (from the HIISC) is displayed:
current site is #
where # is the number of the site logged into.

2 At the CUST MMI prompt type: disp_equipment #
where # is the number of the site logged into.
A complete list of the equipment and functions in the database
is displayed. For example an omni 2 gives:
CSFP 000
BTP 000
DRI 000 (010)
DRI 010 (000)
MMS 000
MMS 010
RSL 000
GCLK 000
EAS 000
CAB 000
SITE 000
PATH 000
RTF 000
RTF 010
Continued
68P02902W96-E 8-29
Aug 2007
Checking the database equipage Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Procedure 8-10 Database equipage check (Continued)

3 To check the MSI configuration at the CUST MMI prompt
type: disp_equipment # MSI 0 0 Where: # is site number.
A message similar to the following example is displayed:
MSI identifier: 0
MSI type [msi_type]: NIU2
8-30 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Checking the backhaul link
Checking the backhaul link

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The backhaul link checks verify the integrity of the links back to the BSC/MSC.
The backhaul link checks require the following test equipment:

• A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the Test equipment, leads
and plugs section).
Commands used
The following command is used to carry out the procedure:
Command Function
state Displays the status of specified devices or
functions.
Test procedures for checking the backhaul link

• Preparation for the network backhaul link check on page 8-32.
• Backhaul link test procedure on page 8-32.
68P02902W96-E 8-31
Aug 2007
Checking the backhaul link Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Preparation for the network backhaul link check
The following procedure is used to set up the equipment to check the backhaul links:
Procedure 8-11 Preparation for the network backhaul link check
1 Make sure the site is in call processing mode.

2 Connect the serial A port on the PC to the HIISC TTY port using the 9-way to
9-way cable.
The system and the hardware are set up to check the backhaul links.
Backhaul link test procedure
Procedure 8-12 Backhaul link test procedure
1 Contact the BSC/MSC of the backhaul link to be tested, and request a loopback
on the relevant Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) port.
Repeat for all backhaul links.
• If the backhaul link has not been installed, perform this test at
the DDF in the site.
• If no DDF is fitted, do this test at the top of the cabinet.
2 Ascertain the site number, equipment list and MMS configuration.
3 At the CUST MMI prompt enter: state # MMS *
* * where # is location, and * * * is dev/func id.
For example: state 2 MMS 0 1 0
Example system message on page 8-33 shows the system message
from the HIISC:
If this display shows Unlocked and Disabled then the T43, cabling and the
backhaul link are all good.
Continued
8-32 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Checking the backhaul link
Procedure 8-12 Backhaul link test procedure (Continued)

If the loop is removed and the command re-entered, the result is displayed.
A delay in excess of 20 seconds may be required before a change in

status is registered.
If the display continues to show Unlocked and Busy, this may be

because:
• The wrong connection is looped, if the cabling is direct.

• The MMS may be terminated by a device generating a backhaul
link.
Example system message
DEVICE STATUS INFORMATION FOR LOCATION 2:

OPER STATES: D:Disabled E:Enabled B:Busy
ADMIN STATES: L:Locked U:Unlocked E:Equipped S:Shutdown
Last Transition Related

Device State Reason dd/mm hh:mm:ss Function
---------- ----- -------------------------- --------------- --------
MMS 0 1 0 B-U No reason 18/02 13:23:05 None
END OF STATUS REPORT
68P02902W96-E 8-33
Aug 2007
Checking PIX connections and alarms Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Checking PIX connections and alarms

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The alarm tests check the serial connections and alarm status.
The PIX connections and alarms checks require the following test equipment:
• A 9-way to 9-way cable.
Commands used
The following commands are used to test the PIX connections:
Command Function
alarm_mode <site_id> on Enables alarm reporting for a specified site.
disp_act_alarm <site_id> Displays active alarms at the specified site.
equip <site_id> EAS Equip the external IAS alarm system at the
specified site.
8-34 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Checking PIX connections and alarms
Test procedures for checking PIX connections and alarms

• Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test on page 8-35.
• PIX connection test procedure on page 8-36.
Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test
Procedure 8-13 Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test
1 Ensure that the software download has been completed.

2 Connect the serial A port on the PC to the master HIISC using the 9-way to
9- way cable.
The system displays the CUST MMI prompt.

4 Enter the password at the CUST MMI prompt.
5 Use the equip <site_id> EAS command to set up reference conditions for
checking that the alarms operate correctly when the appropriate relay changes
state.
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference,

(68P02901W23) for specific details regarding the equip command.
68P02902W96-E 8-35
Aug 2007
Checking PIX connections and alarms Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
PIX connection test procedure
The following procedure can be used to test the PIX connections on each PIX board.
Procedure 8-14 PIX connection test
1 At the CUST MMI prompt type: alarm_mode # on

where # is the site number.
2 Connect a suitable test lead to the PIX connector.
Wait at least six seconds before continuing the testing. The time is
required to allow polling to detect the presence of the test plug.
3 Type the disp_act_alarm command to view the alarms.
The system displays all 8 alarms.
The display depends on the database settings, that is, whether a fault
condition is indicated by a closed loop or an open loop.
If the high power external fan module is fitted to the unit alarm
channel 8 is permanently closed circuit.
4 Change the state of each alarm using the test plug/lead. If the appropriate
relay is operating correctly, the alarm state changes accordingly (alarm either
cleared or activated).
5 Remove the test lead.
The system clears the alarm display.
6 If testing Horizon II macro, repeat procedure for the second PIX board.
8-36 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Site restoration
Site restoration
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
After Tx output power calibration procedures are completed, restore the site using the following
procedure.
Commands used
Table 8-5 lists the commands for the site restoration procedure.
The symbol 0 used in the commands is a zero.
Table 8-5 VSWR and power calibration site restoration commands.
BSS MMI Command Function

disp_act_alarm Displays active alarms at the specified site.
cal_staus tall Displays: the flash retrieval status, the datapool valid
flag and the checksum for all calibration datapools.
disp_cal_data When transceiver is locked:
Displays calibration data in the CM
database for the specified transceiver.
When transceiver is unlocked:
Displays calibration data in the RAM of
Site restoration procedure
After the Tx output power calibration is completed, restore the site by using the following
procedure.
68P02902W96-E 8-37
Aug 2007
Site restoration Chapter 8: Site verication procedures
Procedure 8-15 Post Tx output power calibration site restoration

Remove the signal generator and dummy load and reconnect the site RF cables.
2 Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU2
and connect to the HIISC TTY port.
3 Reset the CTU2 by:
• Horizon II macro and Horizon II mini – Tripping and resetting the

appropriate circuit breaker.
• Horizon II micro – Switching the PSU to output disable (off) and then
switching to output enable (on) again.
(The CTU2 does not have a front panel reset button).
This step must be carried out to initialize software and so ensure that
the CTU2 is correctly brought into service.
4 Type:
unlock_device <site_id> dri <Cell_id> <DRI_identity> 0
The CTU2 is now in the BUSY-UNLOCKED state.
5 Type:
disp_act_alarm <site_id> dri <Cell_id> <DRI_identity> 0
Confirm that there is no DRI 218 alarm. If there is a DRI 218 alarm, redo the
whole bay level calibration procedure.
6 Remove the 9-way to 9-way cables from the HIISC TTY port and connect to
the TTY interface port on the CTU2.
chglev
pizza
(this is a password and appears on screen as *****)
Continued
8-38 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Procedure 8-15 Post Tx output power calibration site restoration (Continued)

8 Verify the calibration result and datapool valid flag by typing
cal_status tall
at the command line and comparing with the
Example of calibration status on page 8-40.
Confirm that the Result and Valid Checksum values are pass and valid,
respectively, for both TX CAB A and TX CAB B.
If these values are incorrect the appropriate calibration must be

repeated.
9 Verify the antenna calibration data or transmit power offset by typing
at the command line and comparing with the Example
of calibration data format (for antenna 0) on page 8-41.
Confirm that the value for the Transmit Power Offsets is correct.
If this value is incorrect the Tx power output calibration must be

repeated.
10 Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU2.
68P02902W96-E 8-39
Aug 2007
Example of calibration status
Entering the cal_status tall command gives a result similar to the example below:
System response:
CTU2.carA.ts_0>cal_status tall
Cal Ca Br Status Result Valid.Checksum Ver S/HC
---------------------------------------------------------------------
RF Lop A 0 pass valid 0x0672d5b5 1 / 1
RF Lop B 0 pass valid 0x0d7b5025 1 / 1
RX RF A 0 pass valid 0x2ae0b9fc 1 / 1
RX RF A 1 pass valid 0x2bb91f4a 1 / 1
RX RF B 0 pass valid 0x2c1ed905 1 / 1
RX RF B 1 pass valid 0x2b063b6b 1 / 1
RX IF A 0 pass valid 0xc8bc3caf 1 / 1
RX IF A 1 pass valid 0xc8d99f37 1 / 1
RX IF B 0 pass valid 0xc8dadb3f 1 / 1
RX IF B 1 pass valid 0xc8bfbd0a 1 / 1
RX FR A 0 pass valid 0xa8fe3af6 1 / 1
RX FR A 1 pass valid 0xa8e8ba39 1 / 1
RX FR B 0 pass valid 0xa8fb5db7 1 / 1
RX FR B 1 pass valid 0xa8f593e0 1 / 1
RX CAB A 0 pass valid 0x53703256 0 / 1
RX CAB B 0 pass valid 0x45562835 0 / 1
TX VVA A 0 pass valid 0xb0be7eb2 1 / 1
TX VVA B 0 pass valid 0x96686359 1 / 1
TX DSA A 0 pass valid 0x01a775df 1 / 1
TX DSA B 0 pass valid 0x01a7863a 1 / 1
TX FP A 0 pass valid 0x09e81286 1 / 1
TX FP B 0 pass valid 0x07c8ee22 1 / 1
TX Ver A 0 pass valid 0x064b1162 1 / 1
TX Ver B 0 pass valid 0x063b5e9a 1 / 1
TX CAB A 0 pass valid 0x019e2da9 1 / 1
TX CAB B 0 pass valid 0x01bd2da9 1 / 1
PA Det A 0 pass valid 0x15cc24be 1 / 1
PA Det B 0 pass valid 0xd7dc8932 1 / 1
PA VVA A 0 pass valid 0xda5d5f94 1 / 1
8-40 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Example of calibration data format (for antenna 0)
Entering the disp_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id> <device_id2> [<device_id3>]

command, for example disp_cal_data 63 dri 0 0 0 gives a result similar to the example
below:
Where: is:
63 site
dri dri device
0 first dev_id
0 second dev_id
0 third dev_id
The example below shows the data from a calibration when Only antenna 0 was calibrated
(It is recommended that all antennas are calibrated, but it is permissible to calibrate only
the antennas to be used).
In the following example: antenna number 1 represents antenna 0A, antenna number 2
represents antenna 1A, antenna number 3 represents antenna 2A, antenna number 4 represents
antenna 0B, antenna number 5 represents antenna 1B, antenna number 6 represents antenna
2B.
System response:
DRI ID: 0 0 0
---------------------------------------------
a4b, e80, e80, a7b, e80, e80
a3e, e80, e80, aff, e80, e80
a5d, e80, e80, b45, e80, e80
a8e, e80, e80, b5e, e80, e80
aca, e80, e80, b4b, e80, e80
ae8, e80, e80, b64, e80, e80
af3, e80, e80, b61, e80, e80
af2, e80, e80, b8b, e80, e80
ae3, e80, e80, b65, e80, e80
ac0, e80, e80, b65, e80, e80
a97, e80, e80, b46, e80, e80
a70, e80, e80, ae7, e80, e80
a2d, e80, e80, a6b, e80, e80
9f6, e80, e80, a28, e80, e80
9b7, e80, e80, 95e, e80, e80
954, e80, e80, 91d, e80, e80
943, e80, e80, 909, e80, e80
921, e80, e80, 8e3, e80, e80
911, e80, e80, 8d5, e80, e80
8ef, e80, e80, 8b7, e80, e80
8d0, e80, e80, 8a1, e80, e80
899, e80, e80, 855, e80, e80
68P02902W96-E 8-41
Aug 2007
8-42 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Chapter
Parts information for Horizon II macro

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
68P02902W96-E 9-1
Aug 2007
Horizon II macro parts lists Chapter 9: Parts information for Horizon II macro
Horizon II macro parts lists

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Introduction to Horizon II macro parts lists
In the parts lists contained in this chapter, each item consists of a description and an order
number. The order number uniquely identifies the required component. Some components may
be used in other equipment in addition to Horizon II macro.
FRU items
The majority of items on the parts list are Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). It is not intended to
supply sub-units of these spares.
Ordering method
Contact the local Motorola office for ordering information, including cost and delivery.
If an item in the parts list is marked TBD, this means that the part number for the item was not
available at the time of publication of this manual.
• Motorola reserves the right to change the design of the product without notice.
The information provided in this chapter is intended as a guide. If the customer
requires the latest information, then consult the Motorola local office who will
be able to check on the web and confirm the current situation.
• Some items, for example PSUs, are produced by different manufacturers, and
so a replacement may appear slightly different to the item it is replacing. All
items bearing the same order number, regardless of manufacturer, are fully
compatible.
9-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Service Manual - Horizon II macro Horizon II macro parts lists
Horizon II macro FRUs
Figure 9-1 shows the Horizon II macro cabinet modules, including major FRUs, without door or
hood/stacking bracket for clarity.
Figure 9-2 shows those FRU items excluded from Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Diagram of Horizon II macro cabinet showing major FRUs
68P02902W96-E 9-3
Aug 2007
Figure 9-2 Additional Horizon II macro FRU components
9-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Spares tables
Table 9-1 to Table 9-5 list the Horizon II macro spares, available as on July 2004. Contact the
Motorola local office for an up to date list.
Structural and thermal control spares
Table 9-1 lists the structural and thermal control spares available for the Horizon II macro.
Table 9-1 Horizon II macro structural and thermal control spares
Item Order Number

Cabinet SVLN9119
Cabinet door SWHN9128
Cabinet hood SVLN1231
Plinth SVLN9129
Stacking bracket SWHN5742
BBU shelf kit SYHN7077
BIM/BIB SWLN4024
CIM/T43 SWLN4025
2-fan unit SWHN9127
Power distribution spares
Table 9-2 lists the power distribution spares available for the Horizon II macro.
Table 9-2 Horizon II macro power distribution spares
Item Order Number

27 V PSU SVPN9143
-48 V PSU SVPN9142
110 V to 240 V ac PSU SVPN9144
Circuit breaker card SWHN9165
(CBC)
Power interface module SVPN4024A
(PIM), dc version
Power interface module SVPN4025A
(PIM), ac version
68P02902W96-E 9-5
Aug 2007
RF component spares
Table 9-3 lists the RF component spares available for the Horizon II macro.
Table 9-3 Horizon II macro RF component spares
Item Order Number

900 MHz CTU2 SWRF9139
1800 MHz CTU2 SWRG9135
900 MHz CTU2D TBD
1800 MHz CTU2D TBD
900 MHz SURF2 SWRF9146
1800 MHz SURF2 SWRG9148
SURF2 Dual band adapter SVLN6092
900 MHz Duplexer (DUP) SVLF9150
1800 MHz Duplexer SVLG9153
(DUP)
PGSM duplexer SVLF7308A
900 MHz Hybrid SVLF9152
combiner unit (HCU)
1800 MHz Hybrid SVLG9155
combiner unit (HCU)
900 MHz Dual hybrid SVLF9657
combiner unit (DHU)
1800 MHz Dual hybrid SVLG9658
combiner unit (DHU)
Blanking plate SVKN4022
Feedthrough plate SWGN1147A
9-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Digital module spares
Table 9-4 lists the digital module spares available for the Horizon II macro.
Table 9-4 Horizon II macro digital module spares
Item Order Number

Horizon II site controller SWLN9221
(HIISC)
Expansion multiplexer SWLN9166
(XMUX)
Alarm module SWLN9222
Site expansion board SWLN9159
Miscellaneous spares
Table 9-5 lists the miscellaneous spares available for the Horizon II macro.
Table 9-5 Horizon II macro miscellaneous spares
Item Order Number

Split sector cable pair SVKN1233
2nd (Expansion) cabinet SVKN1244
fiber
3rd (Expansion) cabinet SVKN1245
fiber
4th (Expansion) cabinet SVKN1246
fiber
SMA 50 ohm load SVLN1230
Compact flash card SVLN2710
CTU2 Tx cable SVKN1304
Duplexer cable SVKN1305
68P02902W96-E 9-7
Aug 2007
9-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Index
Index
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
16 kbit/s RSLs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
access control Alarms (contd.)

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 SURF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Acronyms AMR (adaptive mutirate. . . . . . . . . . 4-11
main cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Anchor bolts
adaptive multirate (AMR) . . . . . . . . . 4-11 torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
air interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 antenna 0
Alarm module calibration status
alarm LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 calibration status example
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75 site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . . 8-41
technical description . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 architecture
alarms HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
PIX arrival at site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 automatic power test
Alarms VSWR
expansion cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
backhaul Battery backup

framing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 optional BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
N-bit facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 bay level calibration
backhaul link frequency tables
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 to 8-32 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48, 7-50
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 BBH
system message example . . . . . . . 8-33 routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 BBH - see also frequency hopping. . . . . 4-18
backhaul LIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 BIB/BIM
Backplane replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Blanking plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Tx block screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
backwards compatibility boards
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 CTU2 internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Base band unit PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Stacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 replace
baseband frequency hopping . . . . . . . 4-18 LIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
68P02902W96-E IX-1
Aug 2007
Index
boards (contd.) BSC (contd.)

site expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 preserve calibration data
XCVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
boot code button
download restrictions . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 CTU2 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
BSC CTU2D reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Cabinet cell site (contd.)

dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 CTU2
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 offset information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Cage channel numbers
backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
CAL port on HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 check
calibration CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
bay level offset tables CTU2 recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Checks
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 CINDY commissioning tool
bay level offset tables . . . . . . . . . 7-46 used for CSPWR calibration. . . . . 7-30, 8-2
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 Circuit breaker card
Rx bay level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48, 7-50 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
test frequency tables . . . . . . . . . 7-56 Circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Tx output power . . . . . . . . . . 8-21, 8-25 clear calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
additional CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 clear_cal_data
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Calibration Clearance
HIISC (GCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82 cabinet positioning . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
calibration data code loading functions . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 commands
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 backhaul link
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
exchange procedures bay level offset tables
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 cell site power (CSPWR) . . . . . . . . . 8-8
preserve clear_cal_data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33, 7-39 CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
enable at BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 database equippage
enable at OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
calibration status PIX connectors and alarms
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
antenna 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 site restoration
site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . . 8-40 power calibration CTU2. . . . . . . . 8-37
example antenna 0 VSWR check CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . . 8-41 VSWR check
CBC CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
circuit breaker identification . . . . . . . 3-8 CTU2 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 compact flash card interface . . . . . . . . 5-9
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Component identification
CBIA main cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
attachment screws . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 components
interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 CTU2 replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 connections
cell site PGSM duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
IX-2 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Index
connections (contd.) CTU2 (contd.)

PIX calibration data exchange procedures. . 7-39
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 cell offset information. . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
connectors connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
CTU2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 constraints when downloading boot
CTU2D front panel . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Connectors CSPWR calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Tx blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
CSFP frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
code loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . 4-15
CSPWR front panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 front panel status indicators . . . . . . 4-16
commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 functional description . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
test equipment required . . . . . . . 7-32 GMSK modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
use of CINDY commissioning tool . . . 7-30, interface function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
7-46, 8-2 interface to SURF2 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
calibration data from database internal boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
clear calbration data . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
display calibration offset data . . . . . . 7-33 power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
enable preserve CTU2 calibration data feature power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
at the BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 recalibration
at the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
site restoration after bay level calibra recalibration procedures . . . . . . . . 7-42
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58 replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
site restoration after Tx output power resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 RF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
store calibration data . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Rx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-17
CSPWR calibration test interface port . . . . . . . . . . 4-15, 4-41
data enable transceiver board . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
at BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 Tx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
at OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 VCAT interface port . . . . . . . . . 4-15, 4-41
data overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
CTU calibration VSWR calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
CTU calibration data CTU2 calibration data
preserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 preserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 enable at BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
alarm data collection . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 enable at OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 CTU2D
backward compatibility . . . . . . . . . 4-11 connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
bay level calibration procedure Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
calibrating bay level offset tables front panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Internal function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
test equipment required . . . . . . . 7-46 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
calibration resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
preserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Rx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 CTU2D functional description. . . . . . . 4-19
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
daisy chain cnfigurations . . . . . . . . . 5-13 data exchange (contd.)

data exchange calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
68P02902W96-E IX-3
Aug 2007
Index
data exchange (contd.) diversity (contd.)

calibration (contd.) reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
database alarm switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
check equippage . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 locking angles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
additional CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 down conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
equippage check Dual band adapter
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
DHU SURF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU)
Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 technical description . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 DUP
Dimensions purpose of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 VSWR monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
indoor cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Duplexer (DUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
diversity Duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 example

EMC antenna 0 calibration status
containment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . . 8-41
equipment calibration status . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
backhaul link antenna 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . . 8-40
database equippage system message
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 backhaul link check . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
PIX connectors and alarms Expansion cabinets
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 alarm transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
VSWR check expansion multiplexer - see XMUX . . . . 5-17
CTU2 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 forward power test

Fan unit VSWR
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Fans manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
heat control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 frequencies
temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Faulty devices frequency
reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 channel numbers and test frequencies. . 7-56
Feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Frequency band characteristics . . . . . . 1-25
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 frequency hopping
Tx block screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 baseband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Flash EEPROM CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 synthesized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
flow control
between NIU control processor and site control
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
IX-4 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Index
Frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

CTU2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 functional description
frequency tables XMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
bay level calibration procedure
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
GCLK GMSK modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Harness HIISC (contd.)

backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 redundancy link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
HCU redundancy testing . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Heat control SDRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
cabinet, PSUs, CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 XMUX functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Heat sensors HIISC (GCLK)
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
CAL port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
code loading functions . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Horizonmacro
diagram showing internal architec component comparison . . . . . . . . . 1-14
ture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 connecting SURF to CTU2 . . . . . . . 4-33
flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Horizon II macro compatibility . . . . . 1-12
front panel interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Hybrid combiner unit (HCU)
front panel switches and indicators . . . . 5-9 technical description . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Hybrid Combining Unit
hard and soft resets . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tx block screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
red LED front panel alarm
CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, 5-41
indicators Interface panel

HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 As part of CBIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
interface interfaces
compact flash card . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
NIU control processor to site control PIX outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Internal function
TTY-MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 CTU2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
LAPD, configuring links . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 LEDs

leaving for the site . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 to 6-9 HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, 5-41
68P02902W96-E IX-5
Aug 2007
Index
links location
LAPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
LIU Loopback
timing extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 RF test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
LIU replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
M-Cell6 manual power test (contd.)

Horizon II macro compatibility . . . . . 1-12 VSWR (contd.)
Maintenance reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
routine maintenance schedule . . . . . . 6-3 Master site controller
Manchester encoding . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Horizonmacro or M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . 1-12
manual power test modules
VSWR XMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 multipath fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Names non-FRU components

main cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . 1-4 replace
NIU CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
control messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 nternal boards
ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 CTU2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
offset tables ouput power calibrate

bay level Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21, 8-25
CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 additional CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
OMC-R preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
preserve calibration data ouput power change
enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
on-site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
PA board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 PIX alarms (contd.)

Parts check (contd.)
ordering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
PGSM connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 PIX connections
PGSM duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 reparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
PIM PIX connections and alarms
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 commands
PIX check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
test lead connections . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
PIX alarms PIX output
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
IX-6 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Index
Power power test (contd.)

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 forward manual
supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
power calibration reverse automatic
commands VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
site restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 reverse manual
Power interface module (PIM) . . . . . . 2-19 VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Power supplies procedures
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 site verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Power supply unit PSU
technical information . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
power test front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
forward automatic replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
rapid site initialization . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 RF connections

recalibration torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 RF equipment
redundancy overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
HIISC link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 RF overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Redundancy RF specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 RF tx output
replace specifications
LIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92 CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
reverse power test RSL
VSWR 16kbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 RSL and span alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
RF Rx bay level
loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48, 7-50
output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 frquency tables
receive hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
transmit hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
safety issues site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

on site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 I/O connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
SDRAM primary function . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Site expansion board
Sensitivity replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Rx performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 site restoration
SFH - see frequency hopping . . . . . . . 4-18 after bay level calibration . . . . . . . . 7-58
site after Tx output power calibration . . . . 8-37
verification procedures . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 commands
visiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 power calibration CTU2. . . . . . . . 8-37
site control processor . . . . . . . . 5-13 to 5-14 VSWR check CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
site controller site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 site visiting
site expansion arrival. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
using mixed hardware . . . . . . . . . 5-18 before leaving. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 to 6-9
68P02902W96-E IX-7
Aug 2007
Index
site visiting (contd.) stages (contd.)

rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 VSWR check (contd.)
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 CTU2 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
waste material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 storing calibration data . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Structural cosiderations
span alarms Structural requirements . . . . . . . . 1-18
reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 SURF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Spares description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 dual band adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
specifications installing a replacement module . . . . 7-66
access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 interface to CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
electrical and RF . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 SURF2 dual band adapter
RF output Tx replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 SURF2 harness
Stacking bracket components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 switches
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Stacking Bracket sync block clock
BBU Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
stages SYNC/NIU TTY port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
VSWR check synthesized frequency hopping . . . . . . 4-18
T43 interconnect board (CIM) Top panel

replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Temperature Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Temperature control TSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 TTY/MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Tx
test equipment channel numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
backhaul link frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Tx block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
CTU2 bay level offset tables connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 fitting a replacement module . . . . . . 7-72
CTU2 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
database equippage screw retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
PIX connectors and alarms Tx ouput power
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
VSWR check additional CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Tx output power
Test leads calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
test stages preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
VSWR check change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Type approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
timeslot interchanger . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
IX-8 68P02902W96-E
Aug 2007
Index
verification VSWR check (contd.)

site procedures test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
LIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 test stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
visiting a site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 VSWR checks
VSWR manual forward power test . . . . . . . 8-18
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 manual reverse power test . . . . . . . 8-20
VSWR check VSWR monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
automatic forward power test . . . . . . 8-16 VSWR restoration
automatic reverse power test . . . . . . 8-17 commands
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 site restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
waste material on site. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Weight (contd.)

Weight cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
XCVR board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 XMUX (contd.)

XMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
functional description . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
68P02902W96-E IX-9
Aug 2007
Standard Printing Instructions
Part Number 68P02902W96-E
Manual Title Service Manual: Horizon II macro
Date August 2007
A5 Ring Bound - GSD (UK)
Binder • D-ring binder – A5 size (148.5mm x 210mm) white PVC.

• 40mm or 65mm capacity depending on the size of the manual.
• Clear pockets on front and spine.
Printing • Cover / spine text overprinted onto Motorola supplied cover stock.
• Body- printed double sided onto white A5 size (148.5mm x 210mm)
80g 3 hole paper.
• Photo reduce to A5.
Finishing • A5 size (148.5mm x 210mm) clear PVC sheet front page for
protection.
• Bag wrapped with clear polythene.
If this is to be used by manufacturing as an Inbox document, then refer to appropriate

Materials or Methods Specification.

Service Manual Horizon Ii Macro

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Horizon Ii Macro

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Horizon Ii Macro

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

68P02902W96-E Aug 2007

© 2003 - 2007 Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Service Manual - Horizon II macro

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Horizon II macro

Introduction to Horizon II macro speciﬁcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Chapter 2: Cabinet structure

Securing pins and hood removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Chapter 3: Power distribution

SURF2 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Chapter 5: Digital modules

View of site expansion board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Chapter 6: Routine maintenance

Chapter 7: FRU replacement procedures

Replacing a cabinet heat sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Introduction to dual band adapter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Chapter 8: Site verication procedures

Site restoration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Chapter 9: Parts information for Horizon II macro

Figure 1-1: Horizon II macro cabinet on plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Figure 4-20: DHU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Service Manual - Horizon II macro

What is covered in this manual?

• Repair procedures and parts lists.

• Understand the function and operation of all components.

• Recognize conﬁgurations and equivalent module functions to previous cabinet designs

• Understand how to inspect, maintain, and repair the equipment.

The following sections show the revision status of this document.

Issue Date of issue Remarks

Resolution of Service Requests

The following Service Requests are resolved in this document:

Incorporation of Change Notices

The following Change Notices (CN) are incorporated in this document:

CN Date CN Number Title

26 Oct 2005 02W96-005 Replacement of an analog wattmeter with a digital

Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our documents.

Questions and comments

• The document title, part number, and revision character

• The page number with the error

• A detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution

In certain instances, Motorola makes speciﬁc recommendations regarding security practices.

Warnings, cautions, and notes

A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional

The following general safety guidelines apply to Motorola equipment:

Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations – 68P81150E62.

• Power down or unplug the equipment before servicing.

• Portions of Motorola equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge.

• Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general

Caring for the environment

Disposal of Motorola equipment

Disposal of surplus packaging

CMM labeling and disclosure table

The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product.

Motorola document set

Ordering documents and CD-ROMs